EP4690544A1 - Receive-transmit time difference for round-trip time associated with non-terrestrial network entity - Google Patents
Receive-transmit time difference for round-trip time associated with non-terrestrial network entityInfo
- Publication number
- EP4690544A1 EP4690544A1 EP24706349.8A EP24706349A EP4690544A1 EP 4690544 A1 EP4690544 A1 EP 4690544A1 EP 24706349 A EP24706349 A EP 24706349A EP 4690544 A1 EP4690544 A1 EP 4690544A1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- timing period
- time stamp
- downlink
- srs
- uplink
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/185—Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
- H04B7/1851—Systems using a satellite or space-based relay
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/08—Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/02—Services making use of location information
- H04W4/029—Location-based management or tracking services
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
- H04W56/0055—Synchronisation arrangements determining timing error of reception due to propagation delay
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
- H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/21—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/22—Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
- H04W8/24—Transfer of terminal data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
- H04W84/06—Airborne or Satellite Networks
Definitions
- aspects of the disclosure relate generally to wireless communications.
- Wireless communication systems have developed through various generations, including a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G), a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service (including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks), a third-generation (3G) high speed data, Internet-capable wireless service and a fourth-generation (4G) service (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) or WiMax).
- a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G) 1G
- a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks
- 3G third-generation
- 4G fourth-generation
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- PCS personal communications service
- Examples of known cellular systems include the cellular analog advanced mobile phone system (AMPS), and digital cellular systems based on code division multiple access (CDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA). time division multiple access (TDMA), the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM), etc.
- CDMA code division multiple access
- FDMA frequency division multiple access
- TDMA time division multiple access
- GSM
- a fifth generation (5G) wireless standard referred to as New Radio (NR)
- NR New Radio
- the 5G standard according to the Next Generation Mobile Networks Alliance, is designed to provide higher data rates as compared to previous standards, more accurate positioning (e.g., based on reference signals for positioning (RS-P), such as downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals (PRS)), and other technical enhancements.
- RS-P reference signals for positioning
- PRS sidelink positioning reference signals
- a method of operating a user equipment includes receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- UL-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- a method of operating a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink dining period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- a method of operating a position estimation entity includes receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Rx-Tx round-trip time
- a method of operating a position estimation entity includes receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference
- a position estimation entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a dow nlink timing period associated with receipt of a dow nlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- UE user equipment
- a position estimation entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) betw een a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- a user equipment includes means for receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity' in a first symbol of a dow nlink timing period; means for transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- U-SRS uplink sounding
- a non -terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes means for receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- a position estimation entity includes means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Rx-Tx round-trip time
- a position estimation entity includes means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a user equipment (UE), cause the UE to: receive a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmit an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, cause the NTN entity to: receive an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity 7 , (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity 7 , cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) aNTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity' based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 2C illustrate example wireless network structures, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C are simplified block diagrams of several sample aspects of components that may be employed in a user equipment (UE), a base station, and a network entity, respectively, and configured to support communications as taught herein.
- UE user equipment
- base station base station
- network entity network entity
- FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating various downlink channels within an example downlink slot, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram of an example positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- PRS positioning reference signal
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating various uplink channels within an example uplink slot, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 8 illustrates examples of various positioning methods supported in New Radio (NR), according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example round-trip-time (RTT) procedure for determining a location of a UE, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing example timings of RTT measurement signals exchanged between a base station and a UE, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 11 illustrates a single-sat multi-RTT technique, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 12 illustrates terrestrial network (TN) timing, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 13 illustrates a UE timing scenario for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 14 illustrates a gNB timing scenario for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- FIG. 15 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- FIG. 16 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- FIG. 18 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- FIG. 19 illustrates an example implementation of the processes of FIGS. 15-18, respectively, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- Various aspects relate generally to receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time differences between a UE and non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity (e.g.. LEO satellite) in various scenarios. Some aspects more specifically relate to UE Rx-Tx time differences, NTN Rx-Tx time differences, or both.
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Particular aspects of the subject matter described in this disclosure can be implemented to realize one or more of the following potential advantages.
- such aspects may provide various technical advantages, such as overcoming some or all of the problems that may arise if terrestrial network (TN) timing techniques for Rx-Tx time differences are mirrored for NTN positioning (e.g., more accurate subframe start time, a ‘coupled' Rx-Tx time difference reporting by both the UE and NTN entity, and so on), which may in turn improve position estimation accuracy of the UE and/or position verification accuracy of the UE.
- TN terrestrial network
- sequences of actions to be performed by, for example, elements of a computing device. It will be recognized that various actions described herein can be performed by specific circuits (e.g., application specific integrated circuits (ASICs)), by program instructions being executed by one or more processors, or by a combination of both. Additionally, the sequence(s) of actions described herein can be considered to be embodied entirely within any form of non- transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored therein a corresponding set of computer instructions that, upon execution, would cause or instruct an associated processor of a device to perform the functionality described herein.
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- a UE may be any wireless communication device (e.g., a mobile phone, router, tablet computer, laptop computer, consumer asset locating device, wearable (e.g., smartwatch, glasses, augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) headset, etc.), vehicle (e.g., automobile, motorcycle, bicycle, etc.), Internet of Things (loT) device, etc.) used by a user to communicate over a wireless communications netw ork.
- a wireless communication device e.g., a mobile phone, router, tablet computer, laptop computer, consumer asset locating device, wearable (e.g., smartwatch, glasses, augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) headset, etc.), vehicle (e.g., automobile, motorcycle, bicycle, etc.), Internet of Things (loT) device, etc.
- a UE maybe mobile or may (e.g., at certain times) be stationary-, and may communicate with a radio access network (RAN).
- RAN radio access network
- the term “UE” may be referred to interchangeably as an “access terminal” or “AT,” a “client device.” a “wireless device.” a “subscriber device,” a “subscriber terminal,” a “subscriber station,” a “user terminal” or “UT,” a “mobile device,” a “mobile terminal,” a “mobile station,” or variations thereof.
- AT access terminal
- client device a “wireless device.”
- UEs can communicate with a core network via a RAN, and through the core network the UEs can be connected with external networks such as the Internet and with other UEs.
- WLAN wireless local area network
- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- a base station may operate according to one of several RATs in communication w ith UEs depending on the netw ork in which it is deployed, and may be alternatively' referred to as an access point (AP), a network node, a NodeB, an evolved NodeB (eNB), a next generation eNB (ng-eNB), a New Radio (NR) Node B (also referred to as a gNB or gNodeB), etc.
- AP access point
- eNB evolved NodeB
- ng-eNB next generation eNB
- NR New Radio
- a base station may be used primarily to support wireless access by UEs. including supporting data, voice, and/or signaling connections for the supported UEs.
- a base station may provide purely edge node signaling functions while in other systems it may provide additional control and/or network management functions.
- a communication link through which UEs can send signals to a base station is called an uplink (UL) channel (e.g., a reverse traffic channel, a reverse control channel, an access channel, etc.).
- a communication link through which the base station can send signals to UEs is called a downlink (DL) or forward link channel (e.g., a paging channel, a control channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.).
- DL downlink
- forward link channel e.g., a paging channel, a control channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.
- traffic channel can refer to either an uplink / reverse or downlink I forward traffic channel.
- the term “base station” may refer to a single physical transmission-reception point (TRP) or to multiple physical TRPs that may or may not be co-located.
- the physical TRP may be an antenna of the base station corresponding to a cell (or several cell sectors) of the base station.
- the physical TRPs may be an array of antennas (e.g., as in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system or where the base station employs beamforming) of the base station.
- MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
- base station refers to multiple non-co-located physical TRPs.
- the physical TRPs may be a distributed antenna system (DAS) (a network of spatially separated antennas connected to a common source via a transport medium) or a remote radio head (RRH) (a remote base station connected to a serving base station).
- DAS distributed antenna system
- RRH remote radio head
- the non-co-located physical TRPs may be the serving base station receiving the measurement report from the UE and a neighbor base station whose reference radio frequency (RF) signals the UE is measuring.
- RF radio frequency
- a base station may not support wireless access by UEs (e.g., may not support data, voice, and/or signaling connections for UEs), but may instead transmit reference signals to UEs to be measured by the UEs, and/or may receive and measure signals transmitted by the UEs.
- a base station maybe referred to as a positioning beacon (e.g., when transmitting signals to UEs) and/or as a location measurement unit (e.g., when receiving and measuring signals from UEs).
- An “RF signal” comprises an electromagnetic wave of a given frequency that transports information through the space between a transmitter and a receiver.
- a transmitter may transmit a single “RF signal” or multiple “RF signals” to a receiver.
- the receiver may receive multiple “RF signals” corresponding to each transmitted RF signal due to the propagation characteristics of RF signals through multipath channels.
- the same transmitted RF signal on different paths between the transmitter and receiver may be referred to as a “multipath” RF signal.
- an RF signal may also be referred to as a "wireless signal” or simply a “signal” where it is clear from the context that the term “signal” refers to a wireless signal or an RF signal.
- the wireless communications system 100 may include various base starions 102 (labeled “BS”) and various UEs 104.
- the base stations 102 may include macro cell base stations (high power cellular base stations) and/or small cell base stations (low power cellular base stations).
- the macro cell base stations may include eNBs and/or ng-eNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to an LTE network, or gNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to a NR network, or a combination of both, and the small cell base stations may include femtocells, picocells, microcells, etc.
- the base stations 102 may collectively form a RAN and interface with a core network 170 (e.g., an evolved packet core (EPC) or a 5G core (5GC)) through backhaul links 122, and through the core network 170 to one or more location servers 172 (e.g., a location management function (LMF) or a secure user plane location (SUPL) location platform (SLP)).
- the location server(s) 172 may be part of core network 170 or may be external to core network 170.
- a location server 172 may be integrated with a base station 102.
- a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 directly or indirectly.
- a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 via the base station 102 that is currently serving that UE 104.
- a UE 104 may also communicate with a location server 172 through another path, such as via an application server (not shown), via another network, such as via a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) (e.g., AP 150 described below), and so on.
- WLAN wireless local area network
- AP access point
- communication between a UE 104 and a location server 172 may be represented as an indirect connection (e.g., through the core network 170, etc.) or a direct connection (e.g., as shown via direct connection 128), with the intervening nodes (if any) omitted from a signaling diagram for clarity.
- the base stations 102 may perform functions that relate to one or more of transferring user data, radio channel ciphering and deciphering, integrity protection, header compression, mobility control functions (e.g., handover, dual connectivity), inter-cell interference coordination, connection setup and release, load balancing, distribution for non-access stratum (NAS) messages, NAS node selection, synchronization, RAN sharing, multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS), subscriber and equipment trace, RAN information management (RIM), paging, positioning, and delivery of warning messages.
- the base stations 102 may communicate with each other directly or indirectly (e.g., through the EPC / 5GC) over backhaul links 134, which may be wired or wireless.
- the base stations 102 may wirelessly communicate with the UEs 104. Each of the base stations 102 may provide communication coverage for a respective geographic coverage area 110. In an aspect, one or more cells may be supported by a base station 102 in each geographic coverage area 110.
- a “cell” is a logical communication entity used for communication with a base station (e.g., over some frequency resource, referred to as a carrier frequency, component carrier, carrier, band, or the like), and may be associated with an identifier (e.g.. a physical cell identifier (PCI), an enhanced cell identifier (ECI), a virtual cell identifier (VCI), a cell global identifier (CGI), etc.) for distinguishing cells operating via the same or a different carrier frequency.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- ECI enhanced cell identifier
- VCI virtual cell identifier
- CGI cell global identifier
- different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g.. machine-type communication (MTC), narrowband loT (NB-IoT), enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), or others) that may provide access for different types of UEs.
- MTC machine-type communication
- NB-IoT narrowband loT
- eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
- a cell may refer to either or both of the logical communication entity and the base station that supports it, depending on the context.
- TRP is typically the physical transmission point of a cell
- the terms “cell” and “TRP” may be used interchangeably.
- the term “cell” may also refer to a geographic coverage area of a base station (e.g., a sector), insofar as a carrier frequency can be detected and used for communication within some portion of geographic coverage areas 110.
- While neighboring macro cell base station 102 geographic coverage areas 110 may partially overlap (e.g., in a handover region), some of the geographic coverage areas 110 may be substantially overlapped by a larger geographic coverage area 110.
- a small cell base station 102' (labeled “SC” for “small cell”) may have a geographic coverage area 110' that substantially overlaps with the geographic coverage area 110 of one or more macro cell base stations 102.
- a network that includes both small cell and macro cell base stations may be known as a heterogeneous network.
- a heterogeneous network may also include home eNBs (HeNBs), which may provide service to a restricted group known as a closed subscriber group (CSG).
- HeNBs home eNBs
- CSG closed subscriber group
- the communication links 120 between the base stations 102 and the UEs 104 may include uplink (also referred to as reverse link) transmissions from a UE 104 to a base station 102 and/or downlink (DL) (also referred to as forward link) transmissions from a base station 102 to a UE 104.
- the communication links 120 may use MIMO antenna technology, including spatial multiplexing, beamforming, and/or transmit diversity.
- the communication links 120 may be through one or more carrier frequencies. Allocation of carriers may be asymmetric with respect to downlink and uplink (e.g., more or less carriers may be allocated for downlink than for uplink).
- the wireless communications system 100 may further include a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) 150 in communication with WLAN stations (STAs) 152 via communication links 154 in an unlicensed frequency spectrum (e.g., 5 GHz).
- WLAN STAs 152 and/or the WLAN AP 150 may perform a clear channel assessment (CCA) or listen before talk (LBT) procedure prior to communicating in order to determine whether the channel is available.
- CCA clear channel assessment
- LBT listen before talk
- the small cell base station 102' may operate in a licensed and/or an unlicensed frequency spectrum. When operating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the small cell base station 102' may employ LTE or NR technology and use the same 5 GHz unlicensed frequency spectrum as used by the WLAN AP 150. The small cell base station 102', employing LTE / 5G in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, may boost coverage to and/or increase capacity of the access network.
- NR in unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as NR-U.
- LTE in an unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as LTE-U, licensed assisted access (LAA), or MULTEFIRE®.
- the wireless communications system 100 may further include a millimeter wave (mmW) base station 180 that may operate in mmW frequencies and/or near mmW frequencies in communication with a UE 182.
- Extremely high frequency (EHF) is part of the RF in the electromagnetic spectrum. EHF has a range of 30 GHz to 300 GHz and a wavelength between 1 millimeter and 10 millimeters. Radio waves in this band may be referred to as a millimeter wave Near mmW may extend down to a frequency of 3 GHz with a wavelength of 100 millimeters.
- the super high frequency (SHF) band extends betw een 3 GHz and 30 GHz, also referred to as centimeter wave.
- the mmW base station 180 and the UE 182 may utilize beamforming (transmit and/or receive) over a mmW communication link 184 to compensate for the extremely high path loss and short range.
- one or more base stations 102 may also transmit using mmW or near mmW and beamforming. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the foregoing illustrations are merely examples and should not be construed to limit the various aspects disclosed herein.
- Transmit beamforming is a technique for focusing an RF signal in a specific direction.
- a network node e.g., a base station
- broadcasts an RF signal it broadcasts the signal in all directions (omni-directionally).
- the network node determines where a given target device (e.g., a UE) is located (relative to the transmitting network node) and projects a stronger downlink RF signal in that specific direction, thereby providing a faster (in terms of data rate) and stronger RF signal for the receiving device(s).
- a network node can control the phase and relative amplitude of the RF signal at each of the one or more transmitters that are broadcasting the RF signal.
- a network node may use an array of antennas (referred to as a “phased array” or an “antenna array”) that creates a beam of RF waves that can be “steered” to point in different directions, without actually moving the antennas.
- the RF current from the transmitter is fed to the individual antennas with the correct phase relationship so that the radio waves from the separate antennas add together to increase the radiation in a desired direction, while cancelling to suppress radiation in undesired directions.
- Transmit beams may be quasi-co-located, meaning that they appear to the receiver (e.g., a UE) as having the same parameters, regardless of whether or not the transmitting antennas of the network node themselves are physically co-located.
- the receiver e.g., a UE
- QCL relation of a given type means that certain parameters about a second reference RF signal on a second beam can be derived from information about a source reference RF signal on a source beam.
- the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
- the source reference RF signal is QCL Type B
- the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and Doppler spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
- the source reference RF signal is QCL Type C
- the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and average delay of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
- the source reference RF signal is QCL Type D
- the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the spatial receive parameter of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
- the receiver uses a receive beam to amplify RF signals detected on a given channel.
- the receiver can increase the gain setting and/or adjust the phase setting of an array of antennas in a particular direction to amplify (e.g., to increase the gain level of) the RF signals received from that direction.
- a receiver is said to beamform in a certain direction, it means the beam gain in that direction is high relative to the beam gain along other directions, or the beam gain in that direction is the highest compared to the beam gain in that direction of all other receive beams available to the receiver. This results in a stronger received signal strength (e.g., reference signal received power (RSRP). reference signal received qualify (RSRQ), signal-to- interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR), etc.) of the RF signals received from that direction.
- RSRP reference signal received power
- RSRQ signal-to- interference-plus-noise ratio
- Transmit and receive beams may be spatially related.
- a spatial relation means that parameters for a second beam (e.g., a transmit or receive beam) for a second reference signal can be derived from information about a first beam (e.g., a receive beam or a transmit beam) for a first reference signal.
- a UE may use a particular receive beam to receive a reference downlink reference signal (e.g., synchronization signal block (SSB)) from a base station.
- the UE can then form a transmit beam for sending an uplink reference signal (e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)) to that base station based on the parameters of the receive beam.
- an uplink reference signal e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)
- a '‘downlink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the dow nlink beam to transmit a reference signal to a UE, the downlink beam is a transmit beam. If the UE is forming the downlink beam, however, it is a receive beam to receive the downlink reference signal.
- an “uplink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink receive beam, and if a UE is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink transmit beam.
- FR1 frequency range designations FR1 (410 MHz - 7.125 GHz) and FR2 (24.25 GHz - 52.6 GHz). It should be understood that although a portion of FR1 is greater than 6 GHz. FR1 is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “Sub-6 GHz” band in various documents and articles.
- FR2 which is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “millimeter wave” band in documents and articles, despite being different from the extremely high frequency (EHF) band (30 GHz - 300 GHz) which is identified by the INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION® as a “millimeter wave” band.
- EHF extremely high frequency
- FR3 7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz
- FR3 7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz
- Frequency bands falling within FR3 may inherit FR1 characteristics and/or FR2 characteristics, and thus may effectively extend features of FR1 and/or FR2 into mid-band frequencies.
- higher frequency bands are currently being explored to extend 5G NR operation beyond 52.6 GHz.
- FR4a or FR4-1 52.6 GHz - 71 GHz
- FR4 52.6 GHz - 114.25 GHz
- FR5 114.25 GHz - 300 GHz.
- Each of these higher frequency bands falls within the EHF band.
- sub-6 GHz or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may be less than 6 GHz, may be within FR1, or may include mid-band frequencies.
- millimeter wave or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may include mid-band frequencies, may be within FR2, FR4, FR4-a or FR4-1, and/or FR5, or may be within the EHF band.
- the anchor carrier is the carrier operating on the primary frequency (e.g., FR1) utilized by a UE 104/182 and the cell in which the UE 104/182 either performs the initial radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment procedure or initiates the RRC connection re-establishment procedure.
- RRC radio resource control
- the primary carrier carries all common and UE-specific control channels, and may be a carrier in a licensed frequency (however, this is not always the case).
- a secondary carrier is a carrier operating on a second frequency (e.g., FR2) that may be configured once the RRC connection is established between the UE 104 and the anchor carrier and that may be used to provide additional radio resources.
- the secondary carrier may be a carrier in an unlicensed frequency.
- the secondary carrier may contain only necessarysignaling information and signals, for example, those that are UE-specific may not be present in the secondary- carrier, since both primary uplink and downlink carriers are ty pically UE-specific. This means that different UEs 104/182 in a cell may have different downlink primary- carriers.
- the netw ork is able to change the primary carrier of any- UE 104/182 at any time. This is done, for example, to balance the load on different carriers. Because a “serving cell” (whether a PCell or an SCell) corresponds to a carrier frequency / component carrier over which some base station is communicating, the term “cell,” “serving cell,” “component carrier,” “carrier frequency,” and the like can be used interchangeably.
- one of the frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 may be an anchor carrier (or “PCell”) and other frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 and/or the mmW base station 180 may be secondarycarriers (“SCells”).
- PCell anchor carrier
- SCells secondarycarriers
- the simultaneous transmission and/or reception of multiple carriers enables the UE 104/182 to significantly increase its data transmission and/or reception rates.
- two 20 MHz aggregated carriers in a multi-carrier system would theoretically lead to a two-fold increase in data rate (i.e. , 40 MHz), compared to that attained by a single 20 MHz carrier.
- the wireless communications system 100 may further include a UE 164 that may communicate with a macro cell base station 102 over a communication link 120 and/or the mmW base station 180 over a mmW communication link 184.
- the macro cell base station 102 may support a PCell and one or more SCells for the UE 164 and the mmW base station 180 may support one or more SCells for the UE 164.
- the UE 164 and the UE 182 may be capable of sidelink communication.
- Sidelink-capable UEs (SL-UEs) may communicate with base stations 102 over communication links 120 using the Uu interface (i.e., the air interface between a UE and a base station).
- SL-UEs may also communicate directly with each other over a wireless sidelink 160 using the PC5 interface (i.e., the air interface between sidelink-capable UEs).
- a wireless sidelink (or just “sidelink”) is an adaptation of the core cellular (e.g.. LTE. NR) standard that allows direct communication between two or more UEs without the communication needing to go through a base station.
- Sidelink communication may be unicast or multicast, and may be used for device-to-device (D2D) media-sharing, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehi cl e-to-every thing (V2X) communication (e.g., cellular V2X (cV2X) communication, enhanced V2X (eV2X) communication, etc.), emergency rescue applications, etc.
- V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
- V2X vehi cl e-to-every thing
- cV2X cellular V2X
- eV2X enhanced V2X
- One or more of a group of SL- UEs utilizing sidelink communications may be within the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102. Other SL-UEs in such a group may be outside the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102 or be otherwise unable to receive transmissions from a base station 102.
- groups of SL-UEs communicating via sidelink communications may utilize a one-to-many (1 :M) system in which each SL-UE transmits to every other SL-UE in the group.
- a base station 102 facilitates the scheduling of resources for sidelink communications.
- sidelink communications are carried out between SL-UEs without the involvement of a base station 102.
- the sidelink 160 may operate over a wireless communication medium of interest, which may be shared with other wireless communications between other vehicles and/or infrastructure access points, as well as other RATs.
- a “medium” may be composed of one or more time, frequency, and/or space communication resources (e.g.. encompassing one or more channels across one or more carriers) associated with wireless communication between one or more transmitter / receiver pairs.
- the medium of interest may correspond to at least a portion of an unlicensed frequency band shared among various RATs.
- FIG. 1 only illustrates two of the UEs as SL-UEs (i.e., UEs 164 and 182), any of the illustrated UEs may be SL-UEs.
- UE 182 was described as being capable of beamforming, any of the illustrated UEs, including UE 164, may be capable of beamforming.
- SL-UEs are capable of beamforming, they may beamform towards each other (i.e., towards other SL-UEs), towards other UEs (e.g., UEs 104). towards base stations (e.g., base stations 102, 180, small cell 102’. access point 150), etc.
- base stations e.g., base stations 102, 180, small cell 102’. access point 150
- UEs 1 4 and 182 may utilize beamforming over sidelink 160.
- any of the illustrated UEs may receive signals 124 from one or more Earth orbiting space vehicles (SVs) 1 12 (e.g., satellites).
- the SVs 1 12 may be part of a satellite positioning system that a UE 104 can use as an independent source of location information.
- a satellite positioning system typically includes a system of transmitters (e.g., SVs 112) positioned to enable receivers (e.g., UEs 104) to determine their location on or above the Earth based, at least in part, on positioning signals (e.g., signals 124) received from the transmitters.
- Such a transmitter ty pically transmits a signal marked with a repeating pseudo-random noise (PN) code of a set number of chips. While typically located in SVs 112, transmitters may sometimes be located on ground-based control stations, base stations 102, and/or other UEs 104.
- a UE 104 may include one or more dedicated receivers specifically designed to receive signals 124 for deriving geo location information from the SVs 112.
- a satellite positioning system the use of signals 124 can be augmented by various satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS) that may be associated with or otherwise enabled for use with one or more global and/or regional navigation satellite systems.
- SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
- an SBAS may include an augmentation system(s) that provides integrity information, differential corrections, etc., such as the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS), the European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), the Multi- functional Satellite Augmentation System (MS AS), the Global Positioning System (GPS) Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN). and/or the like.
- WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
- EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
- MS AS Multi- functional Satellite Augmentation System
- GPS Global Positioning System Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system
- GAN Global Positioning System
- a satellite positioning system may include any combination of one or more global and/or regional navigation satellites associated with
- SVs 112 may additionally or alternatively be part of one or more nonterrestrial networks (NTNs).
- NTN nonterrestrial networks
- an SV 112 is connected to an earth station (also referred to as a ground station, NTN gateway, or gateway), which in turn is connected to an element in a 5G network, such as a modified base station 102 (without a terrestrial antenna) or a network node in a 5GC.
- This element would in turn provide access to other elements in the 5G network and ultimately to entities external to the 5G network, such as Internet web servers and other user devices.
- a UE 104 may receive communication signals (e.g., signals 124) from an SV 112 instead of, or in addition to, communication signals from a terrestrial base station 102.
- the wireless communications system 100 may further include one or more UEs, such as UE 190, that connects indirectly to one or more communication networks via one or more device-to-device (D2D) peer-to-peer (P2P) links (referred to as “sidelinks”).
- D2D device-to-device
- P2P peer-to-peer
- sidelinks referred to as “sidelinks”.
- UE 190 has a D2D P2P link 192 with one of the UEs 104 connected to one of the base stations 102 (e g., through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain cellular connectivity) and a D2D P2P link 194 with WLAN STA 152 connected to the WLAN AP 150 (through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain WLAN-based Internet connectivity).
- the D2D P2P links 192 and 194 may be supported with any well-known D2D RAT, such as LTE Direct (LTE-D), WI-FI DIRECT®, BLUETOOTH®,
- FIG. 2A illustrates an example wireless network structure 200.
- a 5GC 210 also referred to as a Next Generation Core (NGC)
- C-plane control plane
- U-plane user plane
- User plane interface (NG-U) 213 and control plane interface (NG-C) 215 connect the gNB 222 to the 5GC 210 and specifically to the user plane functions 212 and control plane functions 214, respectively.
- an ng-eNB 224 may also be connected to the 5GC 210 via NG-C 215 to the control plane functions 214 and NG-U 213 to user plane functions 212. Further, ng-eNB 224 may directly communicate with gNB 222 via a backhaul connection 223.
- a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 220 may have one or more gNBs 222, while other configurations include one or more of both ng-eNBs 224 and gNBs 222. Either (or both) gNB 222 or ng-eNB 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein).
- a location server 230 which may be in communication with the 5GC 210 to provide location assistance for UE(s) 204.
- the location server 230 can be implemented as a plurality 7 of separate servers (e.g., physically separate serv ers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical serv ers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
- the location server 230 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the location server 230 via the core network, 5GC 210, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). Further, the location server 230 may be integrated into a component of the core network, or alternatively may 7 be external to the core network (e.g., a third party server, such as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) server or service server).
- OEM original equipment manufacturer
- FIG. 2B illustrates another example wireless network structure 240.
- a 5GC 260 (which may correspond to 5GC 210 in FIG. 2A) can be viewed functionally as control plane functions, provided by an access and mobility management function (AMF) 264, and user plane functions, provided by a user plane function (UPF) 262, which operate cooperatively to form the core network (i.e., 5GC 260).
- AMF access and mobility management function
- UPF user plane function
- the functions of the AMF 264 include registration management, connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception, transport for session management (SM) messages between one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) and a session management function (SMF) 266, transparent proxy services for routing SM messages, access authentication and access authorization, transport for short message service (SMS) messages between the UE 204 and the short message service function (SMSF) (not shown), and security anchor functionality (SEAF).
- the AMF 264 also interacts with an authentication server function (AUSF) (not shown) and the UE 204, and receives the intermediate key that was established as a result of the UE 204 authentication process.
- AUSF authentication server function
- the AMF 264 retrieves the security material from the AUSF.
- the functions of the AMF 264 also include security context management (SCM).
- SCM receives a key from the SEAF that it uses to derive access-network specific keys.
- the functionality of the AMF 264 also includes location services management for regulatory services, transport for location services messages between the UE 204 and a location management function (LMF) 270 (which acts as a location server 230), transport for location services messages between the NG-RAN 220 and the LMF 270, evolved packet system (EPS) bearer identifier allocation for interworking with the EPS, and UE 204 mobility event notification.
- LMF location management function
- EPS evolved packet system
- the AMF 264 also supports functionalities for non-3GPP® (Third Generation Partnership Project) access networks.
- Functions of the UPF 262 include acting as an anchor point for intra/inter-RAT mobility (when applicable), acting as an external protocol data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to a data network (not shown), providing packet routing and for arding, packet inspection, user plane policy rule enforcement (e.g..
- the UPF 262 may also support transfer of location services messages over a user plane between the UE 204 and a location server, such as an SLP 272.
- the functions of the SMF 266 include session management. UE Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management, selection and control of user plane functions, configuration of traffic steering at the UPF 262 to route traffic to the proper destination, control of part of policy enforcement and QoS, and downlink data notification.
- IP Internet protocol
- the interface over which the SMF 266 communicates with the AMF 264 is referred to as the Ni l interface.
- Another optional aspect may include an LMF 270, which may be in communication with the 5GC 260 to provide location assistance for UEs 204.
- the LMF 270 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
- the LMF 270 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the LMF 270 via the core network, 5GC 260, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated).
- the SLP 272 may support similar functions to the LMF 270, but whereas the LMF 270 may communicate with the AMF 264, NG-RAN 220, and UEs 204 over a control plane (e.g., using interfaces and protocols intended to convey signaling messages and not voice or data), the SLP 272 may communicate with UEs 204 and external clients (e.g., third-party server 274) over a user plane (e.g., using protocols intended to carryvoice and/or data like the transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or IP).
- TCP transmission control protocol
- Yet another optional aspect may include a third-party server 274. which may be in communication with the LMF 270, the SLP 272, the 5GC 260 (e.g., via the AMF 264 and/or the UPF 262), the NG-RAN 220, and/or the UE 204 to obtain location information (e.g., a location estimate) for the UE 204.
- the third-party server 274 may be referred to as a location services (LCS) client or an external client.
- the third- party server 274 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
- User plane interface 263 and control plane interface 265 connect the 5GC 260, and specifically the UPF 262 and AMF 264, respectively, to one or more gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 in the NG-RAN 220.
- the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the AMF 264 is referred to as the LC N2” interface
- the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the UPF 262 is referred to as the ”N3‘' interface.
- the gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 of the NG-RAN 220 may communicate directly with each other via backhaul connections 223, referred to as the “Xn-C” interface.
- One or more of gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 over a wireless interface, referred to as the "Uu ’ interface.
- gNB-CU gNB central unit
- gNB-DU gNB distributed units
- gNB-RU gNB radio units
- a gNB-CU 226 is a logical node that includes the base station functions of transferring user data, mobility' control, radio access network sharing, positioning, session management, and the like, except for those functions allocated exclusively to the gNB-DU(s) 228. More specifically, the gNB-CU 226 generally host the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocols of the gNB 222.
- RRC radio resource control
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- PDCP packet data convergence protocol
- a gNB-DU 228 is a logical node that generally hosts the radio link control (RLC) and medium access control (MAC) layer of the gNB 222. Its operation is controlled by the gNB-CU 226.
- One gNB-DU 228 can support one or more cells, and one cell is supported by only one gNB-DU 228.
- the interface 232 between the gNB-CU 226 and the one or more gNB-DUs 228 is referred to as the “FU‘ interface.
- the physical (PHY) layer functionality of a gNB 222 is generally- hosted by one or more standalone gNB-RUs 229 that perform functions such as power amplification and signal transmission/reception.
- a UE 204 communicates with the gNB-CU 226 via the RRC, SDAP, and PDCP layers, with a gNB-DU 228 via the RLC and MAC layers, and with a gNB-RU 229 via the PHY layer.
- a network node a network entity, a mobility element of a network, a RAN node, a core network node, a network element, or a network equipment, such as a base station, or one or more units (or one or more components) performing base station functionality, may be implemented in an aggregated or disaggregated architecture.
- a base station such as a Node B (NB), evolved NB (eNB), NR base station, 5GNB, access point (AP), a transmit receive point (TRP), or a cell, etc.
- NB Node B
- eNB evolved NB
- 5GNB 5GNB
- AP access point
- TRP transmit receive point
- a cell etc.
- a base station may be implemented as an aggregated base station (also known as a standalone base station or a monolithic base station) or a disaggregated base station.
- An aggregated base station may be configured to utilize a radio protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated wi thin a single RAN node.
- a disaggregated base station may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more units (such as one or more central or centralized units (CUs), one or more distributed units (DUs), or one or more radio units (RUs)).
- CUs central or centralized units
- DUs distributed units
- RUs radio units
- a CU may be implemented within a RAN node, and one or more DUs may be co-located with the CU, or alternatively, may be geographically or virtually distributed throughout one or multiple other RAN nodes.
- the DUs may be implemented to communicate with one or more RUs.
- Each of the CU, DU and RU also can be implemented as virtual units, i.e.. a virtual central unit (VCU). a virtual distributed unit (VDU), or a virtual radio unit (VRU).
- VCU virtual central unit
- VDU virtual distributed unit
- VRU virtual radio unit
- Base station-type operation or network design may consider aggregation characteristics of base station functionality. For example, disaggregated base stations may be utilized in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open radio access network (0-RAN (such as the network configuration sponsored by the 0-RAN ALLIANCE®)), or a virtualized radio access network (vRAN, also known as a cloud radio access network (C- RAN)).
- IAB integrated access backhaul
- 0-RAN such as the network configuration sponsored by the 0-RAN ALLIANCE®
- vRAN virtualized radio access network
- C- RAN cloud radio access network
- Disaggregation may include distributing functionality across two or more units at various physical locations, as well as distributing functionality for at least one unit virtually, which can enable flexibility in network design.
- the various units of the disaggregated base station, or disaggregated RAN architecture can be configured for wired or wireless communication with at least one other unit.
- FIG. 2C illustrates an example disaggregated base station architecture 250, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- the disaggregated base station architecture 250 may include one or more central units (CUs) 280 (e.g.. gNB-CU 226) that can communicate directly with a core network 267 (e.g., 5GC 210, 5GC 260) via a backhaul link, or indirectly with the core network 267 through one or more disaggregated base station units (such as a Near-Real Time (Near-RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 259 via an E2 link, or a Non-Real Time (Non-RT) RIC 257 associated with a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) Framework 255, or both).
- CUs central units
- a CU 280 may communicate with one or more DUs 285 (e.g., gNB-DUs 228) via respective midhaul links, such as an Fl interface.
- the DUs 285 may communicate with one or more radio units (RUs) 287 (e.g., gNB-RUs 229) via respective fronthaul links.
- the RUs 287 may communicate with respective UEs 204 via one or more radio frequency (RF) access links.
- RF radio frequency
- the UE 204 may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 287.
- Each of the units may include one or more interfaces or be coupled to one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals, data, or information (collectively, signals) via a wired or wireless transmission medium.
- Each of the units, or an associated processor or controller providing instructions to the communication interfaces of the units can be configured to communicate with one or more of the other units via the transmission medium.
- the units can include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
- the units can include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter or transceiver (such as a RF transceiver), configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
- the CU 280 may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions can include RRC, PDCP, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), or the like. Each control function can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 280.
- the CU 280 may be configured to handle user plane functionality (i. e. , Central Unit - User Plane (CU- UP)). control plane functionality (i.e.. Central Unit - Control Plane (CU-CP)). or a combination thereof.
- the CU 280 can be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units.
- the CU-UP unit can communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as the El interface when implemented in an O-RAN configuration.
- the CU 280 can be implemented to communicate with the DU 285, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
- the DU 285 may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more base station functions to control the operation of one or more RUs 287.
- the DU 285 may host one or more of a RLC layer, a MAC layer, and one or more high PHY layers (such as modules for forward error correction (FEC) encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP®).
- the DU 285 may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer (or module) can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers (and modules) hosted by the DU 285, or with the control functions hosted by the CU 280.
- Lower-layer functionality can be implemented by one or more RUs 287.
- an RU 287 controlled by a DU 285, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (such as performing fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse FFT (iFFT), digital beamforming, phy sical random access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like), or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower layer functional split.
- the RU(s) 287 can be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 204.
- OTA over the air
- real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU(s) 287 can be controlled by the corresponding DU 285.
- this configuration can enable the DU(s) 285 and the CU 280 to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
- the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network elements.
- the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (such as an 01 interface).
- the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface).
- a cloud computing platform such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface).
- Such virtualized network elements can include, but are not limited to, CUs 280, DUs 285, RUs 287 and Near-RT RICs 259.
- the SMO Framework 255 can communicate with a hardware aspect of a 4G RAN. such as an open eNB (O-eNB) 261. via an 01 interface. Additionally, in some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate directly with one or more RUs 287 via an 01 interface.
- the SMO Framework 255 also may include aNon-RT RIC 257 configured to support functionality of the SMO Framework 255.
- the Non-RT RIC 257 may be configured to include a logical function that enables non- real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, artificial intelligence/machine learning (AI/ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 259.
- the Non-RT RIC 257 may be coupled to or communicate with (such as via an Al interface) the Near- RT RIC 259.
- the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (such as via an E2 interface) connecting one or more CUs 280, one or more DUs 285, or both, as well as an O-eNB, with the Near-RT RIC 259.
- the Non-RT RIC 257 may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 259 and may be received at the SMO Framework 255 or the Non-RT RIC 257 from non-network data sources or from network functions.
- the Non-RT RIC 257 or the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance.
- the Non-RT RIC 257 may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI/ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO Framework 255 (such as reconfiguration via 01) or via creation of RAN management policies (such as Al policies).
- FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C illustrate several example components (represented by corresponding blocks) that may be incorporated into a UE 302 (which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein), a base station 304 (which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein), and a network entity 306 (which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260 infrastructure depicted in FIGS. 2A and 2B, such as a private network) to support the operations described herein.
- a UE 302 which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein
- a base station 304 which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein
- a network entity 306 which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or
- these components may be implemented in different types of apparatuses in different implementations (e.g., in an ASIC, in a system-on-chip (SoC), etc.).
- the illustrated components may also be incorporated into other apparatuses in a communication system.
- other apparatuses in a system may include components similar to those described to provide similar functionality.
- a given apparatus may contain one or more of the components.
- an apparatus may include multiple transceiver components that enable the apparatus to operate on multiple carriers and/or communicate via different technologies.
- the UE 302 and the base station 304 each include one or more wireless wide area network (WWAN) transceivers 310 and 350, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means fortuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) via one or more wireless communication networks (not shown), such as an NR network, an LTE network, a GSM network, and/or the like.
- the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may each be connected to one or more antennas 316 and 356, respectively, for communicating with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations (e.g.. eNBs.
- the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT.
- signals 318 and 358 e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on
- decoding signals 318 and 358 e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on
- the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 include one or more transmitters 314 and 354, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358, respectively, and one or more receivers 312 and 352. respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358, respectively.
- the UE 302 and the base station 304 each also include, at least in some cases, one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360, respectively.
- the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be connected to one or more antennas 326 and 366, respectively, and provide means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means for tuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations, etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., Wi-Fi. LTE Direct, BLUETOOTH®.
- RAT e.g., Wi-Fi. LTE Direct, BLUETOOTH®.
- the short- range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368 (e g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT.
- signals 328 and 368 e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on
- decoding signals 328 and 368 e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on
- the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 include one or more transmitters 324 and 364, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368, respectively, and one or more receivers 322 and 362, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368, respectively.
- the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be Wi-Fi transceivers, BLUETOOTH® transceivers, ZIGBEE® and/or Z-WAVE® transceivers, NFC transceivers, UWB transceivers, or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) and/or vehicle-to- everything (V2X) transceivers.
- the UE 302 and the base station 304 also include, at least in some cases, satellite signal transceivers 330 and 370, which include satellite receiver(s) 330-1 and/or 370-1, respectiely. and/or satellite transmitter(s) 330-2 and/or 370-2, respectiely.
- the satellite signal Transceivers may alternatively be implemented as Rx-only satellite receivers or Tx-only satellite transmitters.
- the base station 304 is a terrestrial base station which may communicate with satellite(s) via the satellite signal transceiver(s).
- the base station 304 may itself be a satellite (or nonterrestrial entity) which uses the satellite signal transceiver(s) 370 to communicate with terrestrial networks and/or other satellites.
- the satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for receiving and/or measuring satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively.
- the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS®) signals, Galileo signals, Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), QuasiZenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc.
- GPS global positioning system
- GLONASS® global navigation satellite system
- Galileo signals Galileo signals
- Beidou signals Beidou signals
- NAVIC Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System
- QZSS QuasiZenith Satellite System
- the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network.
- the satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for receiving and processing satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378. respectively.
- the satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and, at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements obtained by any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
- the satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for transmitting satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively.
- the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS®) signals, Galileo signals. Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc.
- the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network.
- the satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for transmitting satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively.
- the satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and. at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements transmitted to/from any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
- the base station 304 and the network entity 306 each include one or more network transceivers 380 and 390, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, etc.) with other network entities (e.g., other base stations 304, other network entities 306).
- the base station 304 may employ the one or more network transceivers 380 to communicate with other base stations 304 or network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links.
- the network entity 306 may employ the one or more network transceivers 390 to communicate with one or more base station 304 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links, or with other netw ork entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless core network interfaces.
- a transceiver may be configured to communicate over a wired or wireless link.
- a transceiver (whether a wired transceiver or a wireless transceiver) includes transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364) and receiver circuitry (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362).
- a transceiver may be an integrated device (e.g., embodying transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry in a single device) in some implementations, may comprise separate transmitter circuitry and separate receiver circuitry in some implementations, or may be embodied in other ways in other implementations.
- the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry of a wired transceiver may be coupled to one or more wired network interface ports.
- Wireless transmitter circuitry e.g., transmitters 314, 324. 354, 364
- wireless receiver circuitry' may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326. 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g.. UE 302, base station 304) to perform receive beamforming, as described herein.
- the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry may share the same plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316. 326, 356, 366), such that the respective apparatus can only- receive or transmit at a given time, not both at the same time.
- a wireless transceiver e.g., WWAN transceivers 310 and 350, short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360
- NLM network listen module
- the various wireless transceivers e.g., transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, and network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
- wired transceivers e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
- a transceiver at least one transceiver
- wired transceivers e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations
- backhaul communication between network devices or servers will generally relate to signaling via a wired transceiver
- wireless communication between a UE (e.g., UE 302) and a base station (e.g., base station 304) will generally relate to signaling via a wireless transceiver.
- the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 also include other components that may be used in conjunction with the operations as disclosed herein.
- the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity- 306 include one or more processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, for providing functionality- relating to, for example, wireless communication, and for providing other processing functionality.
- the processors 332, 384, and 394 may therefore provide means for processing, such as means for determining, means for calculating, means for receiving, means for transmitting, means for indicating, etc.
- processors 332, 384, and 394 may include, for example, one or more general purpose processors, multi-core processors, central processing units (CPUs), ASICs, digital signal processors (DSPs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs). other programmable logic devices or processing circuitry, or various combinations thereof.
- the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include memory circuitry 7 implementing memories 340, 386, and 396 (e.g., each including a memory 7 device), respectively, for maintaining information (e.g., information indicative of reserved resources, thresholds, parameters, and so on).
- the memories 340, 386, and 396 may therefore provide means for storing, means for retrieving, means for maintaining, etc.
- the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may include Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398, respectively.
- the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be hardware circuits that are part of or coupled to the processors 332. 384.
- the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be external to the processors 332, 384, and 394 (e.g., part of a modem processing system, integrated with another processing system, etc.).
- the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be memory 7 modules stored in the memories 340, 386, and 396, respectively, that, when executed by the processors 332, 384, and 394 (or a modem processing system, another processing sy stem, etc.), cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein.
- FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
- FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
- FIG. 3B illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 388, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the memory 7 386, the one or more processors 384, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
- FIG. 3C illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 398, which may be, for example, part of the one or more network transceivers 390, the memory 396. the one or more processors 394, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
- the UE 302 may include one or more sensors 344 coupled to the one or more processors 332 to provide means for sensing or detecting movement and/or orientation information that is independent of motion data derived from signals received by the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320, and/or the satellite signal receiver 330.
- the sensor(s) 344 may include an accelerometer (e.g., a micro-electrical mechanical systems (MEMS) device), a gyroscope, a geomagnetic sensor (e.g., a compass), an altimeter (e.g., a barometric pressure altimeter), and/or any other type of movement detection sensor.
- MEMS micro-electrical mechanical systems
- the senor(s) 344 may include a plurality of different types of devices and combine their outputs in order to provide motion information.
- the sensor(s) 344 may use a combination of a multi-axis accelerometer and orientation sensors to provide the ability to compute positions in two-dimensional (2D) and/or three-dimensional (3D) coordinate systems.
- the UE 302 includes a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on).
- a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on).
- the base station 304 and the network entity 306 may also include user interfaces.
- IP packets from the network entity 306 may be provided to the processor 384.
- the one or more processors 384 may implement functionality for an RRC layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a medium access control (MAC) layer.
- PDCP packet data convergence protocol
- RLC radio link control
- MAC medium access control
- the one or more processors 384 may provide RRC layer functionality associated with broadcasting of system information (e.g., master information block (MIB), system information blocks (SIBs)), RRC connection control (e.g., RRC connection paging, RRC connection establishment, RRC connection modification, and RRC connection release), inter-RAT mobility, and measurement configuration for UE measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, security’ (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification), and handover support functions; RLC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs.
- system information e.g., master information block (MIB), system information blocks (SIBs)
- RRC connection control e.g., RRC connection paging, RRC connection establishment, RRC connection modification, and RRC connection release
- inter-RAT mobility e.g., inter-RAT mobility
- PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, security’ (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification),
- error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ), concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC service data units (SDUs), re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, scheduling information reporting, error correction, priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
- ARQ automatic repeat request
- SDUs segmentation
- re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs
- MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, scheduling information reporting, error correction, priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
- the transmitter 354 and the receiver 352 may implement Layer-1 (LI) functionality associated with various signal processing functions.
- Layer-1 which includes a physical (PHY) layer, may include error detection on the transport channels, forward error correction (FEC) coding/decoding of the transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping onto physical channels, modulation/demodulation of physical channels, and MIMO antenna processing.
- FEC forward error correction
- the transmitter 354 handles mapping to signal constellations based on various modulation schemes (e.g., binary phase-shift keying (BPSK), quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK), M-phase-shift keying (M-PSK), M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM)).
- BPSK binary phase-shift keying
- QPSK quadrature phase-shift keying
- M-PSK M-phase-shift keying
- M-QAM M-quadrature amplitude modulation
- Each stream may then be mapped to an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (e.g., pilot) in the time and/or frequency domain, and then combined together using an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) to produce a physical channel carrying a time domain OFDM symbol stream.
- OFDM symbol stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams.
- Channel estimates from a channel estimator may be used to determine the coding and modulation scheme, as well as for spatial processing.
- the channel estimate may be derived from a reference signal and/or channel condition feedback transmitted by the UE 302.
- Each spatial stream may then be provided to one or more different antennas 356.
- the transmitter 354 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
- the receiver 312 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 316.
- the receiver 312 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 332.
- the transmitter 314 and the receiver 312 implement Layer- 1 functionality associated with various signal processing functions.
- the receiver 312 may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial streams destined for the UE 302. If multiple spatial streams are destined for the UE 302, they may be combined by the receiver 312 into a single OFDM symbol stream.
- the receiver 312 then converts the OFDM symbol stream from the time-domain to the frequency domain using a fast Fourier transform (FFT).
- FFT fast Fourier transform
- the symbols on each subcarrier, and the reference signal are recovered and demodulated bydetermining the most likely signal constellation points transmitted by the base station 304. These soft decisions may be based on channel estimates computed by a channel estimator. The soft decisions are then decoded and de-interleaved to recover the data and control signals that were originally transmitted by the base station 304 on the physical channel. The data and control signals are then provided to the one or more processors 332, which implements Layer-3 (L3) and Layer-2 (L2) functionality.
- L3 Layer-3
- L2 Layer-2
- the one or more processors 332 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, and control signal processing to recover IP packets from the core network.
- the one or more processors 332 are also responsible for error detection.
- the one or more processors 332 provides RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, and security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification); RLC layer functionality- associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through ARQ, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs, re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing of MAC SDUs onto transport blocks (TBs), demultiplexing of MAC SDUs from TBs, scheduling information reporting, error correction through hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
- RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting
- Channel estimates derived by the channel estimator from a reference signal or feedback transmitted by the base station 304 may be used by the transmitter 314 to select the appropriate coding and modulation schemes, and to facilitate spatial processing.
- the spatial streams generated by the transmitter 314 may be provided to different antenna(s) 316.
- the transmitter 314 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
- the uplink transmission is processed at the base station 304 in a manner similar to that described in connection with the receiver function at the UE 302.
- the receiver 352 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 356.
- the receiver 352 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 384.
- the one or more processors 384 provides demultiplexing betw een transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, control signal processing to recover IP packets from the UE 302. IP packets from the one or more processors 384 may be provided to the core network.
- the one or more processors 384 are also responsible for error detection.
- the UE 302, the base station 304, and/or the network entity 306 are shown in FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C as including various components that may be configured according to the various examples described herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the illustrated components may have different functionality in different designs. In particular, various components in FIGS. 3A to 3C are optional in alternative configurations and the various aspects include configurations that may vary due to design choice, costs, use of the device, or other considerations. For example, in case of FIG.
- a particular implementation of UE 302 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 310 (e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or personal computer (PC) or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or BLUETOOTH® capability without cellular capability), or may omit the short- range wireless transceiver(s) 320 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 330, or may omit the sensor(s) 344, and so on.
- WWAN transceiver(s) 310 e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or personal computer (PC) or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or BLUETOOTH® capability without cellular capability
- the short- range wireless transceiver(s) 320 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
- satellite signal receiver 330 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
- the base station 304 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 350 (e.g., a Wi-Fi ‘'hotspot” access point without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver(s) 360 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 370, and so on.
- WWAN transceiver(s) 350 e.g., a Wi-Fi ‘'hotspot” access point without cellular capability
- the short-range wireless transceiver(s) 360 e.g., cellular-only, etc.
- satellite signal receiver 370 e.g., satellite signal receiver
- the various components of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may be communicatively coupled to each other over data buses 334, 382, and 392, respectively.
- the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may form, or be part of, a communication interface of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306. respectively.
- the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may provide communication between them.
- FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in various ways. In some implementations, the components of FIGS.
- 3 A, 3B. and 3C may be implemented in one or more circuits such as. for example, one or more processors and/or one or more ASICs (which may include one or more processors).
- each circuit may use and/or incorporate at least one memory component for storing information or executable code used by the circuit to provide this functionality.
- some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 310 to 346 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the UE 302 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components).
- some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 350 to 388 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the base station 304 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components).
- processor and memory 7 component(s) of the network entity 7 306 may be implemented by processor and memory 7 component(s) of the network entity 7 306 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components).
- various operations, acts, and/or functions are described herein as being performed “by a UE,” “by a base station,” “by a network entity,” etc. However, as will be appreciated, such operations, acts, and/or functions may actually be performed by specific components or combinations of components of the UE 302, base station 304, network entity 306, etc., such as the processors 332, 384, 394. the transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, the memories 340, 386, and 396, the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398, etc.
- the network entity 7 306 may 7 be implemented as a core network component.
- the network entity 306 may be distinct from a network operator or operation of the cellular network infrastructure (e.g., NG RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260).
- the network entity 306 may be a component of a private network that may be configured to communicate with the UE 302 via the base station 304 or independently from the base station 304 (e.g., over a non-cellular communication link, such as Wi-Fi).
- FIG. 4 is a diagram 400 illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- the frame structure may be a downlink or uplink frame structure.
- Other wireless communications technologies may have different frame structures and/or different channels.
- LTE. and in some cases NR utilizes orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink and single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM) on the uplink.
- OFDM orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing
- SC-FDM single-carrier frequency division multiplexing
- OFDM and SC-FDM partition the system bandwidth into multiple (K) orthogonal subcarriers, which are also commonly referred to as tones, bins. etc.
- K orthogonal subcarriers
- Each subcarrier may be modulated with data.
- modulation symbols are sent in the frequency domain with OFDM and in the time domain with SC-FDM.
- the spacing between adjacent subcarriers may be fixed, and the total number of subcarriers (K) may be dependent on the system bandwidth.
- the spacing of the subcarriers may be 15 kilohertz (kHz) and the minimum resource allocation (resource block) may be 12 subcarriers (or 180 kHz). Consequently, the nominal fast Fourier transform (FFT) size may be equal to 128, 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 megahertz (MHz), respectively.
- the system bandwidth may also be partitioned into subbands. For example, a subband may cover 1.08 MHz (i.e., 6 resource blocks), and there may be 1, 2. 4, 8, or 16 subbands for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 1 , or 20 MHz, respectively.
- LTE supports a single numerology (subcarrier spacing (SCS), symbol length, etc.).
- p subcarrier spacing
- 15 kHz SCS there is one slot per subframe, 10 slots per frame, the slot duration is 1 millisecond (ms), the symbol duration is 66.7 microseconds (ps), and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 50.
- the slot duration is 0.125 ms
- the symbol duration is 8.33 ps
- the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 400.
- the slot duration is 0.0625 ms
- the symbol duration is 4.17 ps
- the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 800.
- a numerology of 15 kHz is used.
- a 10 ms frame is divided into 10 equally sized subframes of 1 ms each, and each subframe includes one time slot.
- time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
- a resource grid may be used to represent time slots, each time slot including one or more time-concurrent resource blocks (RBs) (also referred to as physical RBs (PRBs)) in the frequency domain.
- RBs time-concurrent resource blocks
- PRBs physical RBs
- the resource grid is further divided into multiple resource elements (REs).
- An RE may correspond to one symbol length in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain.
- an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and seven consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 84 REs.
- an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and six consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 72 REs.
- the number of bits carried by each RE depends on the modulation scheme.
- the REs may cany' reference (pilot) signals (RS).
- the reference signals may include positioning reference signals (PRS), tracking reference signals (TRS), phase tracking reference signals (PTRS), cell-specific reference signals (CRS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), synchronization signal blocks (SSBs), sounding reference signals (SRS), etc., depending on whether the illustrated frame structure is used for uplink or downlink communication.
- FIG. 4 illustrates example locations of REs carrying a reference signal (labeled "R”).
- FIG. 5 is a diagram 500 illustrating various downlink channels within an example downlink slot.
- time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
- a numerology of 15 kHz is used.
- the illustrated slot is one millisecond (ms) in length, divided into 14 symbols.
- BWPs bandwidth parts
- a BWP is a contiguous set of RBs selected from a contiguous subset of the common RBs for a given numerology on a given carrier.
- a maximum of four BWPs can be specified in the downlink and uplink. That is, a UE can be configured with up to four BWPs on the downlink, and up to four BWPs on the uplink. Only one BWP (uplink or downlink) may be active at a given time, meaning the UE may only receive or transmit over one BWP at a time.
- the bandwidth of each BWP should be equal to or greater than the bandwidth of the SSB, but it may or may not contain the SSB.
- a primary synchronization signal is used by a UE to determine subframe/symbol timing and a physical layer identity.
- a secondary synchronization signal is used by a UE to determine a physical layer cell identity group number and radio frame timing. Based on the physical layer identity and the physical layer cell identity 7 group number, the UE can determine a PCI. Based on the PCI, the UE can determine the locations of the aforementioned DL-RS.
- the physical broadcast channel (PBCH), which carries a master information block (MIB). may be logically grouped with the PSS and SSS to form an SSB (also referred to as an SS/PBCH).
- MIB master information block
- the MIB provides a number of RBs in the downlink system bandwidth and a system frame number (SFN).
- the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) carries user data, broadcast system information not transmitted through the PBCH, such as system information blocks (SIBs), and paging messages.
- SIBs system information blocks
- the physical downlink control channel carries downlink control information (DCI) within one or more control channel elements (CCEs), each CCE including one or more RE group (REG) bundles (which may span multiple symbols in the time domain), each REG bundle including one or more REGs. each REG corresponding to 12 resource elements (one resource block) in the frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in the time domain.
- CCE control channel elements
- Each REG corresponding to 12 resource elements (one resource block) in the frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in the time domain.
- the set of physical resources used to carry' the PDCCH/DCI is referred to in NR as the control resource set (CORESET).
- CORESET control resource set
- a PDCCH is confined to a single CORESET and is transmitted with its own DMRS. This enables UE-specific beamforming for the PDCCH.
- the CORESET spans three symbols (although it may be only one or two symbols) in the time domain.
- PDCCH channels are localized to a specific region in the frequency domain (i.e.. a CORESET).
- the frequency component of the PDCCH shown in FIG. 5 is illustrated as less than a single BWP in the frequency domain. Note that although the illustrated CORESET is contiguous in the frequency domain, it need not be. In addition, the CORESET may span less than three symbols in the time domain.
- the DCI within the PDCCH carries information about uplink resource allocation (persistent and non-persistent) and descriptions about downlink data transmitted to the UE, referred to as uplink and downlink grants, respectively. More specifically, the DCI indicates the resources scheduled for the downlink data channel (e.g., PDSCH) and the uplink data channel (e.g., physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)). Multiple (e.g., up to eight) DCIs can be configured in the PDCCH. and these DC Is can have one of multiple formats. For example, there are different DCI formats for uplink scheduling, for downlink scheduling, for uplink transmit power control (TPC), etc.
- a PDCCH may be transported by 1 , 2, 4, 8, or 16 CCEs in order to accommodate different DCI pay load sizes or coding rates.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram of an example PRS configuration 600 for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- time is represented horizontally, increasing from left to right.
- Each long rectangle represents a slot and each short (shaded) rectangle represents an OFDM symbol.
- a PRS resource set 610 (labeled “PRS resource set 1”) includes two PRS resources, a first PRS resource 612 (labeled “PRS resource 1”) and a second PRS resource 614 (labeled “PRS resource 2”).
- the base station transmits PRS on the PRS resources 612 and 614 of the PRS resource set 610.
- the PRS resource set 610 has an occasion length (N_PRS) of two slots and a periodicity (T_PRS) of, for example, 160 slots or 160 milliseconds (ms) (for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing).
- N_PRS occasion length
- T_PRS periodicity
- both the PRS resources 612 and 614 are two consecutive slots in length and repeat every T_PRS slots, starting from the slot in which the first symbol of the respective PRS resource occurs.
- the PRS resource 612 has a symbol length (N_symb) of two symbols
- the PRS resource 614 has a symbol length (N_symb) of four symbols.
- the PRS resource 612 and the PRS resource 614 may be transmitted on separate beams of the same base station.
- the PRS resources 612 and 614 are repeated even’ T PRS slots up to the muting sequence periodicity T REP.
- a bitmap of length T REP would be needed to indicate which occasions of instances 620a, 620b, and 620c of PRS resource set 610 are muted (i.e., not transmitted).
- the base station can configure the following parameters to be the same: (a) the occasion length (N_PRS), (b) the number of symbols (N_symb), (c) the comb type, and/or (d) the bandwidth.
- N_PRS occasion length
- N_symb number of symbols
- comb type comb type
- the bandwidth the bandwidth of the PRS resources of all PRS resource sets
- the subcarrier spacing and the cyclic prefix can be configured to be the same for one base station or for all base stations. Whether it is for one base station or all base stations may depend on the UE’s capability to support the first and/or second option.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram 700 illustrating various uplink channels within an example uplink slot.
- time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
- a numerology of 15 kHz is used.
- the illustrated slot is one millisecond (ms) in length, divided into 14 symbols.
- a random-access channel also referred to as a physical random-access channel (PRACH) may be within one or more slots within a frame based on the PRACH configuration.
- the PRACH may include six consecutive RB pairs within a slot.
- the PRACH allows the UE to perform initial system access and achieve uplink synchronization.
- a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) may be located on edges of the uplink system bandwidth.
- the PUCCH carries uplink control information (UCI), such as scheduling requests, CSI reports, a channel quality indicator (CQI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a rank indicator (RI). and HARQ ACK/NACK feedback.
- the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) carries data, and may additionally be used to carry a buffer status report (BSR), a power headroom report (PHR), and/or UCI.
- BSR buffer status report
- PHR power headroom report
- the reference signal carried on the REs labeled “R” in FIG. 4 may be SRS.
- SRS transmitted by a UE may be used by a base station to obtain the channel state information (CSI) for the transmitting UE.
- CSI describes how an RF signal propagates from the UE to the base station and represents the combined effect of scattering, fading, and power decay with distance.
- the system uses the SRS for resource scheduling, link adaptation, massive MIMO, beam management, etc.
- a collection of REs that are used for transmission of SRS is referred to as an “SRS resource,” and may be identified by the parameter “SRS-Resourceld.”
- the collection of resource elements can span multiple PRBs in the frequency domain and ’N’ (e.g., one or more) consecutive symbol(s) within a slot in the time domain. In a given OFDM symbol, an SRS resource occupies one or more consecutive PRBs.
- An “SRS resource set” is a set of SRS resources used for the transmission of SRS signals, and is identified by an SRS resource set ID (“SRS-ResourceSetld”).
- a comb size ‘N’ represents the subcarrier spacing (or frequency/tone spacing) within each symbol of an SRS resource configuration.
- SRS are transmitted in every Nth subcarrier of a symbol of a PRB.
- REs corresponding to every fourth subcarrier are used to transmit SRS of the SRS resource.
- the illustrated SRS is comb- 4 over four symbols. That is, the locations of the shaded SRS REs indicate a comb-4 SRS resource configuration.
- an SRS resource may span 1, 2, 4, 8, or 12 consecutive symbols within a slot with a comb size of comb-2, comb-4, or comb-8.
- the following are the frequency offsets from symbol to symbol for the SRS comb patterns that are currently supported.
- 1 -symbol comb-2 ⁇ 0 ⁇
- 2-symbol comb-2 ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
- 2-symbol comb-4 ⁇ 0, 2 ⁇
- 4-symbol comb-4 ⁇ 0, 2, 1. 3 ⁇ (as in the example of FIG.
- 8-symbol comb-4 ⁇ 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3 ⁇
- 12-symbol comb-4 ⁇ 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3 ⁇
- 4-symbol comb-8 ⁇ 0, 4, 2, 6 ⁇
- 8-symbol comb-8 ⁇ 0, 4, 2, 6, 1, 5, 3, 7 ⁇
- 12-symbol comb-8 ⁇ 0, 4, 2, 6, 1, 5, 3, 7, 0. 4, 2, 6 ⁇ .
- a UE transmits SRS to enable the receiving base station (either the serving base station or a neighboring base station) to measure the channel quality (i.e., CSI) between the UE and the base station.
- SRS can also be specifically configured as uplink positioning reference signals for uplink-based positioning procedures, such as uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA), round-trip-time (RTT), uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA), etc.
- UL-TDOA uplink time difference of arrival
- RTT round-trip-time
- U-AoA uplink angle-of-arrival
- the former may be referred to herein as '‘SRS-for-communication” and/or the latter may be referred to as “SRS-for-positioning” or “positioning SRS” when needed to distinguish the two types of SRS.
- SRS- for-positioning also referred to as “UL-PRS” or “UL-SRS”
- a new staggered pattern within an SRS resource except for single-symbol/comb-2
- a new comb type for SRS new sequences for SRS
- a higher number of SRS resource sets per component carrier and a higher number of SRS resources per component carrier.
- the parameters “SpatialRelationlnfo” and “PathLossReference” are to be configured based on a downlink reference signal or SSB from a neighboring TRP.
- one SRS resource may be transmitted outside the active BWP, and one SRS resource may span across multiple component carriers.
- SRS may be configured in RRC connected state and only transmitted within an active BWP. Further, there may be no frequency hopping, no repetition factor, a single antenna port, and new lengths for SRS (e.g., 8 and 12 symbols). There also may be open-loop powder control and not closed-loop power control, and comb-8 (i.e., an SRS transmitted every eighth subcarrier in the same symbol) may be used. Lastly, the UE may transmit through the same transmit beam from multiple SRS resources for UL-AoA. All of these are features that are additional to the current SRS framework, which is configured through RRC higher layer signaling (and potentially triggered or activated through a MAC control element (MAC-CE) or downlink control information (DCI)).
- MAC-CE MAC control element
- DCI downlink control information
- NR supports a number of cellular network-based positioning technologies, including downlink-based, uplink-based, and downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods.
- Downlink-based positioning methods include observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) in LTE, dow nlink time difference of arrival (DL-TDOA) in NR, and dow nlink angle-of-departure (DL-AoD) in NR.
- FIG. 8 illustrates examples of various positioning methods, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- a UE measures the differences betw een the times of arrival (ToAs) of reference signals (e.g., positioning reference signals (PRS)) received from pairs of base stations, referred to as reference signal time difference (RSTD) or time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurements, and reports them to a positioning entity. More specifically, the UE receives the identifiers (IDs) of a reference base station (e.g.. a serving base station) and multiple non-reference base stations in assistance data. The UE then measures the RSTD between the reference base station and each of the non-reference base stations. Based on the known locations of the involved base stations and the RSTD measurements, the positioning entity (e.g.. the UE for UE-based positioning or a location server for UE-assisted positioning) can estimate the UE’s location.
- ToAs times of arrival
- PRS positioning reference signals
- RSTD reference signal time difference
- TDOA time difference of arrival
- the positioning entity uses a measurement report from the UE of received signal strength measurements of multiple downlink transmit beams to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the transmitting base station(s). The positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the transmitting base station(s).
- Uplink-based positioning methods include uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) and uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA).
- UL-TDOA is similar to DL-TDOA, but is based on uplink reference signals (e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)) transmitted by the UE to multiple base stations.
- uplink reference signals e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)
- SRS sounding reference signals
- a UE transmits one or more uplink reference signals that are measured by a reference base station and a plurality of non-reference base stations.
- Each base station reports the reception time (referred to as the relative time of arrival (RTOA)) of the reference signal(s) to a positioning entity (e.g., a location server) that knows the locations and relative timing of the involved base stations.
- a positioning entity e.g., a location server
- the positioning entity can estimate the location of the UE using TDOA.
- one or more base stations measure the received signal strength of one or more uplink reference signals (e.g., SRS) received from a UE on one or more uplink receive beams.
- the positioning entity uses the signal strength measurements and the angle(s) of the receive beam(s) to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the base station(s). Based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the base station(s), the positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE.
- Downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods include enhanced cell-ID (E-CID) positioning and multi-round-trip-time (RTT) positioning (also referred to as “multi-cell RTT and “multi-RTT”).
- E-CID enhanced cell-ID
- RTT multi-round-trip-time
- a first entity e.g.. a base station or a UE transmits a first RTT-related signal (e.g., a PRS or SRS) to a second entity (e.g., a UE or base station), which transmits a second RTT-related signal (e.g., an SRS or PRS) back to the first entity.
- a first RTT-related signal e.g., a PRS or SRS
- a second entity e.g., a UE or base station
- a second RTT-related signal e.g., an SRS or PRS
- Each entity measures the time difference between the time of arrival (ToA) of the received RTT-related signal and the transmission time of the transmitted RTT-related signal. This time difference is referred to as a reception-to-transmission (Rx- Tx) time difference.
- the Rx-Tx time difference measurement may be made, or may be adjusted, to include only a time difference between nearest slot boundaries for the received and transmitted signals. Both entities may then send their Rx-Tx time difference measurement to a location server (e.g.. an LMF 270). which calculates the round trip propagation time (i.e., RTT) between the two entities from the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements (e.g., as the sum of the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements). Alternatively, one entity may send its Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the other entity, which then calculates the RTT. The distance between the two entities can be determined from the RTT and the known signal speed (e g., the speed of light).
- a location server e.g. an LMF 270
- RTT round trip propagation time
- the distance between the two entities can be determined from the RTT and the known signal speed (e g., the speed of light).
- a first entity' e.g., a UE or base station
- performs an RTT positioning procedure with multiple second entities e.g., multiple base stations or UEs
- second entities e.g., multiple base stations or UEs
- RTT and multi-RTT methods can be combined with other positioning techniques, such as UL-AoA and DL-AoD, to improve location accuracy, as illustrated by scenario 840.
- the E-CID positioning method is based on radio resource management (RRM) measurements.
- RRM radio resource management
- the UE reports the serving cell ID, the timing advance (TA), and the identifiers, estimated timing, and signal strength of detected neighbor base stations.
- the location of the UE is then estimated based on this information and the known locations of the base station(s).
- a location server may provide assistance data to the UE.
- the assistance data may include identifiers of the base stations (or the cells/TRPs of the base stations) from which to measure reference signals, the reference signal configuration parameters (e.g., the number of consecutive slots including PRS, periodicity of the consecutive slots including PRS, muting sequence, frequency hopping sequence, reference signal identifier, reference signal bandwidth, etc.), and/or other parameters applicable to the particular positioning method.
- the assistance data may originate directly from the base stations themselves (e.g., in periodically broadcasted overhead messages, etc.).
- the UE may be able to detect neighbor network nodes itself without the use of assistance data.
- the assistance data may further include an expected RSTD value and an associated uncertainty, or search window, around the expected RSTD.
- the value range of the expected RSTD may be +/- 500 microseconds (ps).
- the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 32 ps.
- the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 8 ps.
- a location estimate may be referred to by other names, such as a position estimate, location, position, position fix, fix, or the like.
- a location estimate may be geodetic and comprise coordinates (e g., latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude) or may be civic and comprise a street address, postal address, or some other verbal description of a location.
- a location estimate may further be defined relative to some other known location or defined in absolute terms (e.g., using latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude).
- a location estimate may include an expected error or uncertainty (e.g., by including an area or volume within which the location is expected to be included with some specified or default level of confidence).
- NR there may not be precise timing synchronization across the network. Instead, it may be sufficient to have coarse time-synchronization across base stations (e.g., within a cyclic prefix (CP) duration of the orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols).
- RTT-based methods generally only need coarse timing synchronization, and as such, are a preferred positioning method in NR.
- the network nodes 902 may include one or more base stations (e.g., any of the base stations described herein), one or more reconfigurable intelligent displays (RIS), one or more positioning beacons, one or more UEs (e.g., connected over sidelinks), etc.
- base stations e.g., any of the base stations described herein
- RIS reconfigurable intelligent displays
- positioning beacons e.g., one or more UEs (e.g., connected over sidelinks), etc.
- the serving base station e.g.. one of network nodes 902 instructs the UE 904 to measure RTT measurement signals (e.g., PRS) from two or more neighboring network nodes 902 (and typically the serving base station, as at least three network nodes 902 are needed for a two-dimensional location estimate).
- the involved network nodes 902 transmit RTT measurement signals on low reuse resources (e.g.. resources used by the network nodes 902 to transmit system information, where the network nodes 902 are base stations) allocated by the network (e.g., location server 230, LMF 270, SLP 272).
- the UE 904 records the arrival time (also referred to as the receive time, reception time, time of reception, or time of arrival) of each RTT measurement signal relative to the UE’s 904 current downlink timing (e.g., as derived by the UE 904 from a downlink signal received from its serving base station), and transmits a common or individual RTT response signal (e.g., SRS) to the involved network nodes 902 on resources allocated by its serving base station.
- the UE 904 if it not the positioning entity, reports a UE reception-to-transmission (Rx-Tx) time difference measurement to the positioning entity.
- Rx-Tx UE reception-to-transmission
- a UE-centric RTT positioning procedure is similar to the network-based procedure, except that the UE 904 transmits uplink RTT measurement signal(s) (e.g.. on resources allocated by the serving base station).
- the uplink RTT measurement signal(s) are measured by multiple network nodes 902 in the neighborhood of the UE 904.
- Each involved network node 902 responds with a downlink RTT response signal and reports a network node Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the positioning entity.
- the network node Rx-Tx time difference measurement indicates the time difference between the arrival time of the RTT measurement signal at the network node 902 and the transmission time of the RTT response signal.
- the UE 904 if it is not the positioning entity, reports, for each network node 902, a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement that indicates the difference between the transmission time of the RTT measurement signal and the reception time of the RTT response signal.
- a location server with knowledge of the network geometry e.g. location server 230, LMF 270. SLP 272 may provide the locations of the involved network nodes 902 to the UE 904.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram 1000 showing example timings of RTT measurement signals exchanged between a netw ork node 1002 (labeled “Node”) and a UE 1004, according to aspects of the disclosure.
- the UE 1004 may be any of the UEs described herein.
- the network node 1002 may be a base station (e.g., any of the base stations described herein), an RIS. a positioning beacon, another UE (e.g., connected over a sidelink), or the like.
- the network node 1002 (labeled “BS”) sends an RTT measurement signal 1010 (e.g., PRS) to the UE 1004 at time T_l.
- the RTT measurement signal 1010 has some propagation delay T_Prop as it travels from the netw ork node 1002 to the UE 1004.
- T_2 the reception time of the RTT measurement signal 1010 at the UE 1004
- the UE 1004 measures the RTT measurement signal 1010.
- the UE 1004 transmits an RTT response signal 1020 (e.g.. SRS) at time T_3.
- the network node 1002 measures the RTT response signal 1020 from the UE 1004 at time T_4 (the reception time of the RTT response signal 1020 at the network node 1002).
- the UE 1004 reports the difference between time T 3 and time T 2 (i.e., the UE’s 1004 Rx-Tx time difference measurement, shown as UE_Rx-Tx 1012) to the positioning entity.
- the network node 1002 reports the difference betw een time T_4 and time T_1 (i.e., the network node’s 1002 Rx-Tx time difference measurement, shown as Node_Rx- Tx 1022) to the positioning entity.
- the positioning entity can calculate the location of the UE 1004. As shown in FIG. 9, the location of the UE 1004 lies at the common intersection of three semicircles, each semicircle being defined by a radius of the distance between the UE 1004 and a respective network node 1002.
- the positioning entity may calculate the UE’s 904/1004 location using atwo- dimensional coordinate system; however, the aspects disclosed herein are not so limited, and may also be applicable to determining locations using a three-dimensional coordinate system, if the extra dimension is desired.
- FIG. 9 illustrates one UE 904 and three network nodes 902
- FIG. 10 illustrates one UE 1004 and one netw ork node 1002, as will be appreciated, there may be more UEs 904/1004 and more netw ork nodes 902/1002.
- Support is contemplated in some communications systems (e.g., Rel-18 NR NTN WI) to support a single-sat multi-RTT technique for network verified UE location in.
- multi-RTT may be used to support the network verified UE location in NTN assuming a single satellite in view-.
- multi-RTT technique for positioning in terrestrial networks is already supported by 3 GPP, enhancements are needed to take account of the fast movement of satellites, e.g.:
- FIG. 11 illustrates a single-sat multi-RTT technique 1100, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- a fast-moving low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite 1102 is depicted at locations denoted as (1). (2), (3) and (4).
- the LEO satellite 1102 transmits a DL-PRS for RTT to UE 1104, denoted as RTT1.
- the LEO satellite 1102 receives a UL-PRS for RTT from UE 1104, denoted as RTT2.
- the LEO satellite 1102 transmits a DL-PRS for RTT to UE 1104, denoted as RTT3.
- the LEO satellite 1102 receives a UL-PRS for RTT from UE 1104, denoted as RTT4.
- RTT4 a UL-PRS for RTT from UE 1104, denoted as RTT4.
- the fast-moving nature of the LEO satellite 1 102 provides sufficient spatial diversity for position estimation and/or position verification of the UE 1104 (which even if moving, is moving at much less speed than the LEO satellite 1104 and in comparison may be considered “stationary'’).
- FIG. 12 illustrates terrestrial network (TN) timing 1200. in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- TN terrestrial network
- a gNB DL timing reference, a gNB UL timing reference, a UE DL timing reference, and a UE UL timing reference are depicted with respect to a subframe.
- RTT TuE-RX-rx+T g NB_RX-TX.
- UE reports TUE-RX-TX with time stamp being the slot number of a DL PRS, m.
- the gNB reports T 8 NB RX-TX with time stamp being the slot number of a SRS, n.
- LMF can match the two as long as m and n are not too far away. For this reason, UE and gNB reports are decoupled, i.e., UE have the freedom to choose the subframes (SF) for which TUE-RX-TX are reported and gNB have the freedom to choose the received SRS for which T g NB RX-TX are reported.
- SF subframes
- TUE-RX-TX and T g NB RX-TX do not need to be for the same TN subframe.
- TA UE timing advance
- FIG. 13 illustrates a UE timing scenario 1300 for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- a UE DL subframe i significantly lags a UE UL subframe i, which may have a higher tendency to occur in NTN positioning.
- Various problems may occur if TN timing techniques for RTT are migrated to NTN positioning.
- TUE-RX-TX UE Rx-Tx Time Difference
- UE Rx- Tx time difference is the TA.
- TUE RX-TX TA (of subframe j)-(j-i) subframe durations at UE
- subframe j is unknown in NTN to the Network in general unless accurate TA is reported.
- the maximum RTT change in 1 ms may be 90 ns. UEs may thereby have different TAs for slots in SF.
- FIG. 14 illustrates a gNB timing scenario 1400 for TUE-R -TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- Various problems may occur if TN timing techniques for RTT are migrated to NTN positioning.
- T g NB-RX-Tx Time Difference
- aspects of the disclosure are directed to Rx-Tx time differences between a UE and NTN entity (e.g., LEO satellite) in various scenarios.
- NTN entity e.g., LEO satellite
- Such aspects may provide various technical advantages, such as overcoming some or all of the problems that may arise if TN timing techniques for Rx-Tx time differences are mirrored for NTN positioning (e.g., more accurate subframe start time, a ‘coupled’ Rx-Tx time difference reporting by both the UE and NTN entity, and so on), which may in turn improve position estimation accuracy of the UE and/or position verification accuracy of the UE.
- FIG. 15 illustrates an exemplary process 1500 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- the process 1500 of FIG. 15 is performed by a UE, such as UE 302.
- UE 302 e.g., receiver 312 or 322 or 330, etc.
- a means for performing the reception of 1510 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 330, etc., of FIG. 3A.
- UE 302 e.g., transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc. transmits an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- a means for performing the transmission of 1520 may include transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc., of FIG. 3 A.
- UE 302 transmits a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp.
- the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- information “sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)-(iii), e g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii).
- a means for performing the transmission of 1530 may include transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc., of FIG. 3A.
- the downlink timing period is a downlink slot, a downlink subframe, or a dow nlink symbol
- the uplink timing period is an uplink slot, an uplink subframe, or an uplink symbol.
- a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
- the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on.
- indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DL-RS may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
- a DL-PRS instance associated w ith the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
- the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
- the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- the UE further transmits a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates the type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity (e.g., LMF), and receives a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN (e g., from position estimation entity such as LMF).
- a position estimation entity e.g., LMF
- the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication may indicate the exact UE Rx-Tx time difference definition and associated reports that the UE is capable of measuring/reporting For instance, if a legacy Rx-Tx time difference is measured, UE may further add Doppler information (e.g., so that the position estimation entity can apply a Doppler-based adjustment to the legacy Rx-Tx time difference). Alternatively, if the UE can support one or more of the ‘new’ Rx-Tx time differences described above, the UE is capable of measuring/reporting a new Rx-Tx time difference without expressly indicating the Doppler to the position estimation entity.
- Doppler information e.g., so that the position estimation entity can apply a Doppler-based adjustment to the legacy Rx-Tx time difference.
- the UE can support one or more of the ‘new’ Rx-Tx time differences described above, the UE is capable of measuring/reporting a new Rx-Tx time difference without expressly
- the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information (e.g., if the UE is not instructed to use a particular measurement report configuration, a measurement report configuration selected/used by the UE may instead be indicated in the measurement report).
- FIG. 16 illustrates an exemplary process 1600 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- the process 1600 of FIG. 16 is performed by aNTN entity, such as BS 304, NTN entity 1102, etc.
- the NTN entity e.g., receiver 352 or 362 or 370-1, etc.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- a means for performing the reception of 1610 may include receiver 352 or 362 or 370-1, etc., of FIG. 3B.
- the NTN entity e.g., transmitter 354 or 364 or 370-2, etc. transmits a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp.
- the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- information “sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least tw o of (i)-(iii), e.g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii).
- a means for performing the transmission of 1620 may include transmitter 354 or 364 or 370-2, etc., of FIG. 3B.
- the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI- RS) (e.g., or any other type of DL-RS).
- the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- the downlink timing period is a downlink slot, a downlink subframe, or a do nlink symbol
- the uplink timing period is an uplink slot, an uplink subframe, or an uplink symbol.
- a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
- the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on.
- indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DL-RS may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
- a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
- the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless netw ork component, or the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the NTN entity Rx- Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.,.
- FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary process 1700 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- the process 1700 of FIG. 17 is performed by a position estimation entity.
- the position estimation entity may correspond to a network component (e.g., an LMF integrated at gNB/BS 304/NTN entity or 0-RAN component or a remote location server such as network entity 306, etc ).
- the position estimation entity may correspond to another UE (e.g., sidelink anchor UE) or to the target UE itself (e.g...
- any Rx/Tx operations between the UE and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the UE over a data bus, etc.) or to the NTN entity itself (e.g., in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the NTN entity and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the NTN entity over a data bus, etc.).
- the process 1700 of FIG. 17 at the position estimation entity may correspond to a process performed in parallel with the process 1500 of FIG. 15 at the UE.
- the position estimation entity receives a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp.
- UE user equipment
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- information ⁇ ’sufficient" to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)- (iii), e.g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii).
- a means for performing the reception of 1710 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or network transceiver(s) 380 or 390, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
- the position estimation entity determines a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- RTT round-trip time
- a means for performing the determination of 1720 may include processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx- Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C. depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
- the position estimation entity may further determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and may transmit an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively. In this manner, particular UL-SRS instances.
- the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe
- the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe.
- a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
- the downlink timing period is a slot
- the first time stamp may be a slot indication
- the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on.
- indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DLRS e.g., DL-PRS, etc.
- this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
- the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
- the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- FIG. 18 illustrates an exemplary process 1800 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
- the process 1800 of FIG. 18 is performed by a position estimation entity.
- the position estimation entity may correspond to a network component (e g., an LMF integrated at gNB/BS 304/NTN entity or 0-RAN component or a remote location server such as network entity 306, etc.).
- the position estimation entity may correspond to another UE (e.g., sidelink anchor UE) or to the target UE itself (e.g...
- any Rx/Tx operations between the UE and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information betw een different logical components of the UE over a data bus, etc.) or to the NTN entity itself (e.g., in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the NTN entity and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the NTN entity over a data bus. etc ).
- the process 1800 of FIG. 18 at the position estimation entity may correspond to a process performed in parallel with the process 1600 of FIG. 16 at the NTN entity.
- the position estimation entity' receives a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp.
- Rx-Tx NTN entity receive-transmit
- information ‘"sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)-(iii), e.g.. (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii).
- a means for performing the reception of 1810 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or network transceivers) 380 or 390, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
- the position estimation entity determines a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity' based at least in part on the information.
- RTT round-trip time
- a means for performing the determination of 1820 may include processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx-Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
- the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS), or the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe
- the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe.
- a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
- the downlink timing period is a slot
- the first time stamp may be a slot indication
- the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on.
- indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DLRS may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
- FIG. 19 illustrates an example implementation 1900 of the processes 1500-1800 of FIGS. 15-18, respectively, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- a Type-2 UE Rx-Tx time difference in NTN is the time gap between the received timing of subframe(slot) i of a transmission point (TP) and the transmit timing of a UL subframe(slot) j of the TP, depicted in FIG. 19 as Tl.
- Tl transmission point
- the subframe/slot j containing a SRS.
- subframe/slot i must contain a PRS that is closet to subframe/slot j in time at UE.
- the received timing is determined by the DL PRS that starts within the subframe.
- nominal symbol duration e.g., assuming zero Doppler shift
- the nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211.
- UE reports the transmit SF/slot index j and SF/slot index i or the SF/slot index j and the difference between SF/slot index i and j, or the SF/slot index i and the difference between i and j.
- LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported.
- UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
- a new type (Type-2) UE Rx-Tx time difference is defined.
- the UE Rx-Tx time difference is the time difference of received timing of subframe/slot i of a TP and the transmit timing of subframe/slot i of the TP (i.e., TA of SF/slot i).
- the received timing of a subframe/slot may be determined by one or multiple PRS from the TP.
- UE reports the time stamp, the subframe/slot index of the SRS. together with UE Rx-Tx time difference.
- LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported.
- UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx- Tx to be measured and reported.
- nominal symbol duration is assumed for symbols before the start of PRS/SRS in the subframe/slot.
- the nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
- legacy UE- Rx-Tx time difference (as used in TN positioning) with enhancements may be utilized.
- UE reports the transmit SF/slot index j and SF/slot index i or the SF/slot index j and the difference between SF/slot index i and j, or the SF/slot index i and the difference between i and j.
- UE reports the Doppler of the DL signal together with each UE Rx-Tx time difference LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported.
- UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported.
- nominal symbol duration is assumed for symbols before the start of PRS/SRS in the subframe/slot.
- the nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
- both a new type (Type-2) UE Rx-Tx time difference and legacy UE Rx-Tx time difference can be supported.
- either UE or LMF indicates which t pe to be reported (e.g., based on UE capability, etc.). While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
- example clauses can also include a combination of the dependent clause aspect(s) with the subject matter of any other dependent clause or independent clause or a combination of any feature with other dependent and independent clauses.
- the various aspects disclosed herein expressly include these combinations, unless it is explicitly expressed or can be readily inferred that a specific combination is not intended (e.g., contradictory aspects, such as defining an element as both an electrical insulator and an electrical conductor).
- aspects of a clause can be included in any other independent clause, even if the clause is not directly dependent on the independent clause.
- a method of operating a user equipment comprising: receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- UL-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- Clause 4 The method of any of clauses 1 to 3, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL- SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 5 The method of clause 4, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 6 The method of any of clauses 1 to 5, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 7 The method of any of clauses 1 to 6, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
- Clause 8 The method of any of clauses 1 to 7, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 9 The method of any of clauses 1 to 8. further comprising: transmitting a UE Rx- Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receiving a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
- a method of operating a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity comprising: receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-RS downlink positioning reference signal
- Clause 14 The method of any of clauses 12 to 13, wherein the DL-RS is aDL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI-RS).
- DL-PRS DL positioning reference signal
- DL-CSI-RS DL channel state information RS
- Clause 15 The method of any of clauses 11 to 14, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 17 The method of any of clauses 1 1 to 16, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 18 The method of clause 17, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 19 The method of any of clauses 11 to 18, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 20 The method of any of clauses 11 to 19, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity 7 Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
- a method of operating a position estimation entity comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Rx-Tx round-trip time
- Clause 22 The method of clause 21, further comprising: determining a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmitting an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
- Clause 23 The method of any of clauses 21 to 22, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 24 The method of any of clauses 21 to 23, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 25 The method of any of clauses 21 to 24, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- a method of operating a position estimation entity comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- Clause 27 The method of clause 26, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-RS downlink positioning reference signal
- Clause 28 The method of clause 27, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- Clause 29 The method of any of clauses 26 to 28, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 30 The method of any of clauses 26 to 29, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- a user equipment comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory' and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmit, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, where
- DL-PRS downlink positioning
- Clause 34 The UE of any of clauses 31 to 33, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 35 The UE of clause 34, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 36 The UE of any of clauses 31 to 35, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 37 The UE of any of clauses 31 to 36, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
- Clause 38 The UE of any of clauses 31 to 37. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 39 The UE of any of clauses 31 to 38, wherein the at least one processor is further configured to: transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
- a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- UTN uplink sounding reference signal
- Clause 45 The NTN of any of clauses 41 to 44, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 46 The NTN entity of any of clauses 41 to 45, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 47 The NTN entity 7 of any of clauses 41 to 46, w erein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 48 The NTN entity of clause 47, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 49 The NTN entity' of any of clauses 41 to 48, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 50 The NTN entity of any of clauses 41 to 49, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
- a position estimation entity comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a dow nlink timing period associated w ith receipt of a dow nlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in
- UE user equipment
- Clause 52 The position estimation entity' of clause 51, wherein the at least one processor is further configured to: determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
- Clause 53 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 51 to 52, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 54 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 51 to 53. wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
- a position estimation entity comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively ⁇ coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- Clause 58 The position estimation entity of clause 57. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- Clause 59 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 56 to 58, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 60 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 56 to 59, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- a user equipment comprising: means for receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; means for transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity’ at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- Clause 62 The UE of clause 61, wherein the do nlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 63 The UE of clause 62, wherein a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
- Clause 64 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 63, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 65 The UE of clause 64, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 66 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 65, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 67 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 66, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
- Clause 68 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 67. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 69 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 68, further comprising: means for transmitting a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and means for receiving a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
- Clause 70 The UE of any of clauses 61 to 69, wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
- a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity comprising: means for receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- Clause 72 The NTN entity of clause 71, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-RS downlink positioning reference signal
- Clause 74 The NTN entity of any of clauses 72 to 73, wherein the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI- RS).
- DL-PRS DL positioning reference signal
- DL-CSI- RS DL channel state information RS
- Clause 75 The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 74, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 76 The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 75, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 77 The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 76, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 78 The NTN entity of clause 77, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 79 The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 78, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 80 The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 79, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
- a position estimation entity comprising: means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Rx-Tx round-trip time
- Clause 82 The position estimation entity of clause 81, further comprising: means for determining a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and means for transmitting an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
- Clause 83 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 82, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 84 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 83. wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 85 The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 84, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- a position estimation entity comprising: means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (hi) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- Clause 87 The position estimation entity of clause 86, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-RS downlink positioning reference signal
- Clause 88 The position estimation entity of clause 87, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a user equipment (UE), cause the UE to: receive a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a dow link timing period; transmit an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference signal
- NTN non
- Clause 92 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 91, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 94 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 93, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE. and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 95 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 94, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 96 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 95, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 97 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 96, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx- Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
- Clause 98 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 97, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 99 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 98. further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the UE, cause the UE to: transmit a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receive a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity 7 , cause the NTN entity to: receive an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
- U-SRS uplink sounding reference signal
- UE user equipment
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- Clause 102 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 101, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
- DL-RS downlink positioning reference signal
- Clause 103 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 102, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSLRS).
- DL-PRS DL positioning reference signal
- DL-CSLRS DL channel state information RS
- Clause 105 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 104, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 106 The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 105, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 107 The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 106, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
- Clause 108 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 107, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
- LMF location management function
- Clause 109 The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 108, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
- Clause 110 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 109. wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity', cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity' and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- DL-PRS downlink positioning reference symbol
- NTN non-terrestrial network
- Rx-Tx round-trip time
- Clause 112. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 111, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmit an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL- SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
- Clause 113 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 112, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- Clause 114 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 113, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
- Clause 115 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 114, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
- Rx-Tx receive-transmit
- Clause 118 The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 117, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
- Clause 119 The non-transitor ' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 116 to 118, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
- Clause 120 The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 116 to 119, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field-programable gate array
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
- a processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration.
- a software module may reside in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
- An example storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
- the storage medium may be integral to the processor.
- the processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC.
- the ASIC may reside in a user terminal (e.g.. UE).
- the processor and the storage medium may reside as discrete components in a user terminal.
- the functions described may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium.
- Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
- a storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer.
- such computer-readable media can comprise RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
- any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
- the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave
- DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of medium.
- Disk and disc includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Disclosed are techniques for wireless communication. In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) reports a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference. A position estimation entity determines a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information. In another aspect, the NTN entity transmits a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit Rx-Tx time difference. A position estimation entity determines a (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
Description
RECEIVE-TRANSMIT TIME DIFFERENCE FOR ROUND-TRIP TIME ASSOCIATED WITH NON-TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ENTITY
BACKGROUND OF THE DISCLOSURE
1. Field of the Disclosure
[0001] Aspects of the disclosure relate generally to wireless communications.
2. Description of the Related Art
[0002] Wireless communication systems have developed through various generations, including a first-generation analog wireless phone service (1G), a second-generation (2G) digital wireless phone service (including interim 2.5G and 2.75G networks), a third-generation (3G) high speed data, Internet-capable wireless service and a fourth-generation (4G) service (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) or WiMax). There are presently many different types of wireless communication systems in use, including cellular and personal communications service (PCS) systems. Examples of known cellular systems include the cellular analog advanced mobile phone system (AMPS), and digital cellular systems based on code division multiple access (CDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA). time division multiple access (TDMA), the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM), etc.
[0003] A fifth generation (5G) wireless standard, referred to as New Radio (NR), enables higher data transfer speeds, greater numbers of connections, and better coverage, among other improvements. The 5G standard, according to the Next Generation Mobile Networks Alliance, is designed to provide higher data rates as compared to previous standards, more accurate positioning (e.g., based on reference signals for positioning (RS-P), such as downlink, uplink, or sidelink positioning reference signals (PRS)), and other technical enhancements. These enhancements, as well as the use of higher frequency bands, advances in PRS processes and technology , and high-density deployments for 5G, enable highly accurate 5G-based positioning.
SUMMARY
[0004] The following presents a simplified summary relating to one or more aspects disclosed herein. Thus, the following summary should not be considered an extensive overview
relating to all contemplated aspects, nor should the following summary be considered to identify key or critical elements relating to all contemplated aspects or to delineate the scope associated with any particular aspect. Accordingly, the following summary has the sole purpose to present certain concepts relating to one or more aspects relating to the mechanisms disclosed herein in a simplified form to precede the detailed description presented below.
[0005] In an aspect, a method of operating a user equipment (UE) includes receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0006] In an aspect, a method of operating a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink dining period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0007] In an aspect, a method of operating a position estimation entity includes receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with
transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0008] In an aspect, a method of operating a position estimation entity includes receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0009] In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) includes a memory: at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmit, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0010] In an aspect, a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp
corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0011] In an aspect, a position estimation entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a dow nlink timing period associated with receipt of a dow nlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0012] In an aspect, a position estimation entity includes a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) betw een a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0013] In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) includes means for receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity' in a first symbol of a dow nlink timing period; means for transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp,
wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0014] In an aspect, a non -terrestrial network (NTN) entity includes means for receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0015] In an aspect, a position estimation entity includes means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0016] In an aspect, a position estimation entity includes means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0017] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a user equipment (UE), cause the UE to: receive a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmit an uplink sounding reference
signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0018] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, cause the NTN entity to: receive an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0019] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity7, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0020] In an aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity7, cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to
determine (i) aNTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity' based at least in part on the information.
[0021] Other objects and advantages associated with the aspects disclosed herein will be apparent to those skilled in the art based on the accompanying drawings and detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0022] The accompanying drawings are presented to aid in the description of various aspects of the disclosure and are provided solely for illustration of the aspects and not limitation thereof.
[0023] FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0024] FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 2C illustrate example wireless network structures, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0025] FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C are simplified block diagrams of several sample aspects of components that may be employed in a user equipment (UE), a base station, and a network entity, respectively, and configured to support communications as taught herein.
[0026] FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0027] FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating various downlink channels within an example downlink slot, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0028] FIG. 6 is a diagram of an example positioning reference signal (PRS) configuration for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0029] FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating various uplink channels within an example uplink slot, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0030] FIG. 8 illustrates examples of various positioning methods supported in New Radio (NR), according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0031] FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example round-trip-time (RTT) procedure for determining a location of a UE, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0032] FIG. 10 is a diagram showing example timings of RTT measurement signals exchanged between a base station and a UE, according to aspects of the disclosure.
[0033] FIG. 11 illustrates a single-sat multi-RTT technique, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
[0034] FIG. 12 illustrates terrestrial network (TN) timing, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
[0035] FIG. 13 illustrates a UE timing scenario for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
[0036] FIG. 14 illustrates a gNB timing scenario for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
[0037] FIG. 15 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
[0038] FIG. 16 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
[0039] FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
[0040] FIG. 18 illustrates an exemplary process of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure.
[0041] FIG. 19 illustrates an example implementation of the processes of FIGS. 15-18, respectively, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0042] Aspects of the disclosure are provided in the following description and related drawings directed to various examples provided for illustration purposes. Alternate aspects may be devised without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Additionally, well-known elements of the disclosure will not be described in detail or will be omitted so as not to obscure the relevant details of the disclosure.
[0043] Various aspects relate generally to receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time differences between a UE and non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity (e.g.. LEO satellite) in various scenarios. Some aspects more specifically relate to UE Rx-Tx time differences, NTN Rx-Tx time differences, or both.
[0044] Particular aspects of the subject matter described in this disclosure can be implemented to realize one or more of the following potential advantages. In some examples, such aspects may provide various technical advantages, such as overcoming some or all of the problems that may arise if terrestrial network (TN) timing techniques for Rx-Tx time differences are mirrored for NTN positioning (e.g., more accurate subframe start time, a ‘coupled' Rx-Tx time difference reporting by both the UE and NTN entity, and so on), which may in turn improve position estimation accuracy of the UE and/or position verification accuracy of the UE.
[0045] The words “exemplary” and/or “example” are used herein to mean “serving as an example, instance, or illustration.” Any aspect described herein as “exemplary” and/or “example” is not necessarily to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other aspects. Likewise, the term “aspects of the disclosure” does not require that all aspects of the disclosure include the discussed feature, advantage or mode of operation.
[0046] Those of skill in the art will appreciate that the information and signals described below may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description below may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof, depending in part on the particular application, in part on the desired design, in part on the corresponding technology, etc.
[0047] Further, many aspects are described in terms of sequences of actions to be performed by, for example, elements of a computing device. It will be recognized that various actions described herein can be performed by specific circuits (e.g., application specific integrated circuits (ASICs)), by program instructions being executed by one or more processors, or by a combination of both. Additionally, the sequence(s) of actions described herein can be considered to be embodied entirely within any form of non- transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored therein a corresponding set of computer instructions that, upon execution, would cause or instruct an associated processor of a device to perform the functionality described herein. Thus, the various aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in a number of different forms, all of which have been contemplated to be within the scope of the claimed subject matter. In addition,
for each of the aspects described herein, the corresponding form of any such aspects maybe described herein as, for example, “logic configured to” perform the described action.
[0048] As used herein, the terms “user equipment” (UE) and “base station” are not intended to be specific or otherwise limited to any particular radio access technology- (RAT), unless otherwise noted. In general, a UE may be any wireless communication device (e.g., a mobile phone, router, tablet computer, laptop computer, consumer asset locating device, wearable (e.g., smartwatch, glasses, augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) headset, etc.), vehicle (e.g., automobile, motorcycle, bicycle, etc.), Internet of Things (loT) device, etc.) used by a user to communicate over a wireless communications netw ork. A UE maybe mobile or may (e.g., at certain times) be stationary-, and may communicate with a radio access network (RAN). As used herein, the term “UE” may be referred to interchangeably as an “access terminal” or “AT,” a “client device.” a “wireless device.” a “subscriber device,” a “subscriber terminal,” a “subscriber station,” a “user terminal” or “UT,” a “mobile device,” a “mobile terminal,” a “mobile station,” or variations thereof. Generally, UEs can communicate with a core network via a RAN, and through the core network the UEs can be connected with external networks such as the Internet and with other UEs. Of course, other mechanisms of connecting to the core network and/or the Internet are also possible for the UEs, such as over wared access networks, wireless local area network (WLAN) networks (e.g., based on the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 specification, etc.) and so on.
[0049] A base station may operate according to one of several RATs in communication w ith UEs depending on the netw ork in which it is deployed, and may be alternatively' referred to as an access point (AP), a network node, a NodeB, an evolved NodeB (eNB), a next generation eNB (ng-eNB), a New Radio (NR) Node B (also referred to as a gNB or gNodeB), etc. A base station may be used primarily to support wireless access by UEs. including supporting data, voice, and/or signaling connections for the supported UEs. In some systems a base station may provide purely edge node signaling functions while in other systems it may provide additional control and/or network management functions. A communication link through which UEs can send signals to a base station is called an uplink (UL) channel (e.g., a reverse traffic channel, a reverse control channel, an access channel, etc.). A communication link through which the base station can send signals to UEs is called a downlink (DL) or forward link channel (e.g., a paging channel, a control
channel, a broadcast channel, a forward traffic channel, etc.). As used herein the term traffic channel (TCH) can refer to either an uplink / reverse or downlink I forward traffic channel.
[0050] The term “base station” may refer to a single physical transmission-reception point (TRP) or to multiple physical TRPs that may or may not be co-located. For example, where the term “base station” refers to a single physical TRP, the physical TRP may be an antenna of the base station corresponding to a cell (or several cell sectors) of the base station. Where the term “base station” refers to multiple co-located physical TRPs, the physical TRPs may be an array of antennas (e.g., as in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system or where the base station employs beamforming) of the base station. Where the term “base station” refers to multiple non-co-located physical TRPs. the physical TRPs may be a distributed antenna system (DAS) (a network of spatially separated antennas connected to a common source via a transport medium) or a remote radio head (RRH) (a remote base station connected to a serving base station). Alternatively, the non-co-located physical TRPs may be the serving base station receiving the measurement report from the UE and a neighbor base station whose reference radio frequency (RF) signals the UE is measuring. Because a TRP is the point from which a base station transmits and receives wireless signals, as used herein, references to transmission from or reception at a base station are to be understood as referring to a particular TRP of the base station.
[0051] In some implementations that support positioning of UEs. a base station may not support wireless access by UEs (e.g., may not support data, voice, and/or signaling connections for UEs), but may instead transmit reference signals to UEs to be measured by the UEs, and/or may receive and measure signals transmitted by the UEs. Such a base station maybe referred to as a positioning beacon (e.g., when transmitting signals to UEs) and/or as a location measurement unit (e.g., when receiving and measuring signals from UEs).
[0052] An “RF signal” comprises an electromagnetic wave of a given frequency that transports information through the space between a transmitter and a receiver. As used herein, a transmitter may transmit a single “RF signal” or multiple “RF signals” to a receiver. However, the receiver may receive multiple “RF signals” corresponding to each transmitted RF signal due to the propagation characteristics of RF signals through multipath channels. The same transmitted RF signal on different paths between the transmitter and receiver may be referred to as a “multipath” RF signal. As used herein,
an RF signal may also be referred to as a "wireless signal” or simply a “signal” where it is clear from the context that the term “signal” refers to a wireless signal or an RF signal. [0053] FIG. 1 illustrates an example wireless communications system 100. according to aspects of the disclosure. The wireless communications system 100 (which may also be referred to as a wireless wide area network (WWAN)) may include various base starions 102 (labeled “BS”) and various UEs 104. The base stations 102 may include macro cell base stations (high power cellular base stations) and/or small cell base stations (low power cellular base stations). In an aspect, the macro cell base stations may include eNBs and/or ng-eNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to an LTE network, or gNBs where the wireless communications system 100 corresponds to a NR network, or a combination of both, and the small cell base stations may include femtocells, picocells, microcells, etc.
[0054] The base stations 102 may collectively form a RAN and interface with a core network 170 (e.g., an evolved packet core (EPC) or a 5G core (5GC)) through backhaul links 122, and through the core network 170 to one or more location servers 172 (e.g., a location management function (LMF) or a secure user plane location (SUPL) location platform (SLP)). The location server(s) 172 may be part of core network 170 or may be external to core network 170. A location server 172 may be integrated with a base station 102. A UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 directly or indirectly. For example, a UE 104 may communicate with a location server 172 via the base station 102 that is currently serving that UE 104. A UE 104 may also communicate with a location server 172 through another path, such as via an application server (not shown), via another network, such as via a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) (e.g., AP 150 described below), and so on. For signaling purposes, communication between a UE 104 and a location server 172 may be represented as an indirect connection (e.g., through the core network 170, etc.) or a direct connection (e.g., as shown via direct connection 128), with the intervening nodes (if any) omitted from a signaling diagram for clarity.
[0055] In addition to other functions, the base stations 102 may perform functions that relate to one or more of transferring user data, radio channel ciphering and deciphering, integrity protection, header compression, mobility control functions (e.g., handover, dual connectivity), inter-cell interference coordination, connection setup and release, load balancing, distribution for non-access stratum (NAS) messages, NAS node selection,
synchronization, RAN sharing, multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS), subscriber and equipment trace, RAN information management (RIM), paging, positioning, and delivery of warning messages. The base stations 102 may communicate with each other directly or indirectly (e.g., through the EPC / 5GC) over backhaul links 134, which may be wired or wireless.
[0056] The base stations 102 may wirelessly communicate with the UEs 104. Each of the base stations 102 may provide communication coverage for a respective geographic coverage area 110. In an aspect, one or more cells may be supported by a base station 102 in each geographic coverage area 110. A “cell” is a logical communication entity used for communication with a base station (e.g., over some frequency resource, referred to as a carrier frequency, component carrier, carrier, band, or the like), and may be associated with an identifier (e.g.. a physical cell identifier (PCI), an enhanced cell identifier (ECI), a virtual cell identifier (VCI), a cell global identifier (CGI), etc.) for distinguishing cells operating via the same or a different carrier frequency. In some cases, different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g.. machine-type communication (MTC), narrowband loT (NB-IoT), enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), or others) that may provide access for different types of UEs. Because a cell is supported by a specific base station, the term “cell” may refer to either or both of the logical communication entity and the base station that supports it, depending on the context. In addition, because a TRP is typically the physical transmission point of a cell, the terms “cell” and “TRP” may be used interchangeably. In some cases, the term “cell” may also refer to a geographic coverage area of a base station (e.g., a sector), insofar as a carrier frequency can be detected and used for communication within some portion of geographic coverage areas 110.
[0057] While neighboring macro cell base station 102 geographic coverage areas 110 may partially overlap (e.g., in a handover region), some of the geographic coverage areas 110 may be substantially overlapped by a larger geographic coverage area 110. For example, a small cell base station 102' (labeled “SC” for “small cell”) may have a geographic coverage area 110' that substantially overlaps with the geographic coverage area 110 of one or more macro cell base stations 102. A network that includes both small cell and macro cell base stations may be known as a heterogeneous network. A heterogeneous
network may also include home eNBs (HeNBs), which may provide service to a restricted group known as a closed subscriber group (CSG).
[0058] The communication links 120 between the base stations 102 and the UEs 104 may include uplink (also referred to as reverse link) transmissions from a UE 104 to a base station 102 and/or downlink (DL) (also referred to as forward link) transmissions from a base station 102 to a UE 104. The communication links 120 may use MIMO antenna technology, including spatial multiplexing, beamforming, and/or transmit diversity. The communication links 120 may be through one or more carrier frequencies. Allocation of carriers may be asymmetric with respect to downlink and uplink (e.g., more or less carriers may be allocated for downlink than for uplink).
[0059] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) 150 in communication with WLAN stations (STAs) 152 via communication links 154 in an unlicensed frequency spectrum (e.g., 5 GHz). When communicating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the WLAN STAs 152 and/or the WLAN AP 150 may perform a clear channel assessment (CCA) or listen before talk (LBT) procedure prior to communicating in order to determine whether the channel is available.
[0060] The small cell base station 102' may operate in a licensed and/or an unlicensed frequency spectrum. When operating in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, the small cell base station 102' may employ LTE or NR technology and use the same 5 GHz unlicensed frequency spectrum as used by the WLAN AP 150. The small cell base station 102', employing LTE / 5G in an unlicensed frequency spectrum, may boost coverage to and/or increase capacity of the access network. NR in unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as NR-U. LTE in an unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as LTE-U, licensed assisted access (LAA), or MULTEFIRE®.
[0061] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a millimeter wave (mmW) base station 180 that may operate in mmW frequencies and/or near mmW frequencies in communication with a UE 182. Extremely high frequency (EHF) is part of the RF in the electromagnetic spectrum. EHF has a range of 30 GHz to 300 GHz and a wavelength between 1 millimeter and 10 millimeters. Radio waves in this band may be referred to as a millimeter wave Near mmW may extend down to a frequency of 3 GHz with a wavelength of 100 millimeters. The super high frequency (SHF) band extends betw een 3
GHz and 30 GHz, also referred to as centimeter wave. Communications using the mmW/near mmW radio frequency band have high path loss and a relatively short range. The mmW base station 180 and the UE 182 may utilize beamforming (transmit and/or receive) over a mmW communication link 184 to compensate for the extremely high path loss and short range. Further, it will be appreciated that in alternative configurations, one or more base stations 102 may also transmit using mmW or near mmW and beamforming. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the foregoing illustrations are merely examples and should not be construed to limit the various aspects disclosed herein.
[0062] Transmit beamforming is a technique for focusing an RF signal in a specific direction. Traditionally, when a network node (e.g., a base station) broadcasts an RF signal, it broadcasts the signal in all directions (omni-directionally). With transmit beamforming, the network node determines where a given target device (e.g., a UE) is located (relative to the transmitting network node) and projects a stronger downlink RF signal in that specific direction, thereby providing a faster (in terms of data rate) and stronger RF signal for the receiving device(s). To change the directionality of the RF signal when transmitting, a network node can control the phase and relative amplitude of the RF signal at each of the one or more transmitters that are broadcasting the RF signal. For example, a network node may use an array of antennas (referred to as a “phased array” or an “antenna array”) that creates a beam of RF waves that can be “steered” to point in different directions, without actually moving the antennas. Specifically, the RF current from the transmitter is fed to the individual antennas with the correct phase relationship so that the radio waves from the separate antennas add together to increase the radiation in a desired direction, while cancelling to suppress radiation in undesired directions.
[0063] Transmit beams may be quasi-co-located, meaning that they appear to the receiver (e.g., a UE) as having the same parameters, regardless of whether or not the transmitting antennas of the network node themselves are physically co-located. In NR, there are four ty pes of quasi-co-location (QCL) relations. Specifically, a QCL relation of a given type means that certain parameters about a second reference RF signal on a second beam can be derived from information about a source reference RF signal on a source beam. Thus, if the source reference RF signal is QCL Type A, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference
RF signal is QCL Type B, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and Doppler spread of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference RF signal is QCL Type C, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the Doppler shift and average delay of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel. If the source reference RF signal is QCL Type D, the receiver can use the source reference RF signal to estimate the spatial receive parameter of a second reference RF signal transmitted on the same channel.
[0064] In receive beamforming, the receiver uses a receive beam to amplify RF signals detected on a given channel. For example, the receiver can increase the gain setting and/or adjust the phase setting of an array of antennas in a particular direction to amplify (e.g., to increase the gain level of) the RF signals received from that direction. Thus, when a receiver is said to beamform in a certain direction, it means the beam gain in that direction is high relative to the beam gain along other directions, or the beam gain in that direction is the highest compared to the beam gain in that direction of all other receive beams available to the receiver. This results in a stronger received signal strength (e.g., reference signal received power (RSRP). reference signal received qualify (RSRQ), signal-to- interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR), etc.) of the RF signals received from that direction.
[0065] Transmit and receive beams may be spatially related. A spatial relation means that parameters for a second beam (e.g., a transmit or receive beam) for a second reference signal can be derived from information about a first beam (e.g., a receive beam or a transmit beam) for a first reference signal. For example, a UE may use a particular receive beam to receive a reference downlink reference signal (e.g., synchronization signal block (SSB)) from a base station. The UE can then form a transmit beam for sending an uplink reference signal (e.g., sounding reference signal (SRS)) to that base station based on the parameters of the receive beam.
[0066] Note that a '‘downlink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the dow nlink beam to transmit a reference signal to a UE, the downlink beam is a transmit beam. If the UE is forming the downlink beam, however, it is a receive beam to receive the downlink reference signal. Similarly, an “uplink” beam may be either a transmit beam or a receive beam, depending on the entity forming it. For example, if a base station is forming the
uplink beam, it is an uplink receive beam, and if a UE is forming the uplink beam, it is an uplink transmit beam.
[0067] The electromagnetic spectrum is often subdivided, based on frequency /wavelength, into various classes, bands, channels, etc. In 5G NR two initial operating bands have been identified as frequency range designations FR1 (410 MHz - 7.125 GHz) and FR2 (24.25 GHz - 52.6 GHz). It should be understood that although a portion of FR1 is greater than 6 GHz. FR1 is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “Sub-6 GHz” band in various documents and articles. A similar nomenclature issue sometimes occurs with regard to FR2, which is often referred to (interchangeably) as a “millimeter wave” band in documents and articles, despite being different from the extremely high frequency (EHF) band (30 GHz - 300 GHz) which is identified by the INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION® as a “millimeter wave” band.
[0068] The frequencies between FR1 and FR2 are often referred to as mid-band frequencies. Recent 5G NR studies have identified an operating band for these mid-band frequencies as frequency range designation FR3 (7.125 GHz - 24.25 GHz). Frequency bands falling within FR3 may inherit FR1 characteristics and/or FR2 characteristics, and thus may effectively extend features of FR1 and/or FR2 into mid-band frequencies. In addition, higher frequency bands are currently being explored to extend 5G NR operation beyond 52.6 GHz. For example, three higher operating bands have been identified as frequency range designations FR4a or FR4-1 (52.6 GHz - 71 GHz), FR4 (52.6 GHz - 114.25 GHz), and FR5 (114.25 GHz - 300 GHz). Each of these higher frequency bands falls within the EHF band.
[0069] With the above aspects in mind, unless specifically stated otherwise, it should be understood that the term “sub-6 GHz” or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may be less than 6 GHz, may be within FR1, or may include mid-band frequencies. Further, unless specifically stated otherwise, it should be understood that the term “millimeter wave” or the like if used herein may broadly represent frequencies that may include mid-band frequencies, may be within FR2, FR4, FR4-a or FR4-1, and/or FR5, or may be within the EHF band.
[0070] In a multi-carrier system, such as 5G, one of the carrier frequencies is referred to as the “primary carrier” or “anchor carrier” or “primary serving cell” or “PCell,” and the remaining carrier frequencies are referred to as “secondary carriers” or “secondary
serving cells” or “SCells.” In carrier aggregation, the anchor carrier is the carrier operating on the primary frequency (e.g., FR1) utilized by a UE 104/182 and the cell in which the UE 104/182 either performs the initial radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment procedure or initiates the RRC connection re-establishment procedure. The primary carrier carries all common and UE-specific control channels, and may be a carrier in a licensed frequency (however, this is not always the case). A secondary carrier is a carrier operating on a second frequency (e.g., FR2) that may be configured once the RRC connection is established between the UE 104 and the anchor carrier and that may be used to provide additional radio resources. In some cases, the secondary carrier may be a carrier in an unlicensed frequency. The secondary carrier may contain only necessarysignaling information and signals, for example, those that are UE-specific may not be present in the secondary- carrier, since both primary uplink and downlink carriers are ty pically UE-specific. This means that different UEs 104/182 in a cell may have different downlink primary- carriers. The same is true for the uplink primary- carriers. The netw ork is able to change the primary carrier of any- UE 104/182 at any time. This is done, for example, to balance the load on different carriers. Because a “serving cell” (whether a PCell or an SCell) corresponds to a carrier frequency / component carrier over which some base station is communicating, the term “cell,” “serving cell,” “component carrier,” “carrier frequency,” and the like can be used interchangeably.
[0071] For example, still referring to FIG. 1. one of the frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 may be an anchor carrier (or “PCell”) and other frequencies utilized by the macro cell base stations 102 and/or the mmW base station 180 may be secondarycarriers (“SCells”). The simultaneous transmission and/or reception of multiple carriers enables the UE 104/182 to significantly increase its data transmission and/or reception rates. For example, two 20 MHz aggregated carriers in a multi-carrier system would theoretically lead to a two-fold increase in data rate (i.e. , 40 MHz), compared to that attained by a single 20 MHz carrier.
[0072] The wireless communications system 100 may further include a UE 164 that may communicate with a macro cell base station 102 over a communication link 120 and/or the mmW base station 180 over a mmW communication link 184. For example, the macro cell base station 102 may support a PCell and one or more SCells for the UE 164 and the mmW base station 180 may support one or more SCells for the UE 164.
[0073] In some cases, the UE 164 and the UE 182 may be capable of sidelink communication. Sidelink-capable UEs (SL-UEs) may communicate with base stations 102 over communication links 120 using the Uu interface (i.e., the air interface between a UE and a base station). SL-UEs (e.g., UE 164, UE 182) may also communicate directly with each other over a wireless sidelink 160 using the PC5 interface (i.e., the air interface between sidelink-capable UEs). A wireless sidelink (or just “sidelink”) is an adaptation of the core cellular (e.g.. LTE. NR) standard that allows direct communication between two or more UEs without the communication needing to go through a base station. Sidelink communication may be unicast or multicast, and may be used for device-to-device (D2D) media-sharing, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehi cl e-to-every thing (V2X) communication (e.g., cellular V2X (cV2X) communication, enhanced V2X (eV2X) communication, etc.), emergency rescue applications, etc. One or more of a group of SL- UEs utilizing sidelink communications may be within the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102. Other SL-UEs in such a group may be outside the geographic coverage area 110 of a base station 102 or be otherwise unable to receive transmissions from a base station 102. In some cases, groups of SL-UEs communicating via sidelink communications may utilize a one-to-many (1 :M) system in which each SL-UE transmits to every other SL-UE in the group. In some cases, a base station 102 facilitates the scheduling of resources for sidelink communications. In other cases, sidelink communications are carried out between SL-UEs without the involvement of a base station 102.
[0074] In an aspect, the sidelink 160 may operate over a wireless communication medium of interest, which may be shared with other wireless communications between other vehicles and/or infrastructure access points, as well as other RATs. A “medium” may be composed of one or more time, frequency, and/or space communication resources (e.g.. encompassing one or more channels across one or more carriers) associated with wireless communication between one or more transmitter / receiver pairs. In an aspect, the medium of interest may correspond to at least a portion of an unlicensed frequency band shared among various RATs. Although different licensed frequency bands have been reserved for certain communication systems (e.g., by a government entity such as the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in the United States), these systems, in particular those employing small cell access points, have recently extended operation into
unlicensed frequency bands such as the Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) band used by wireless local area network (WLAN) technologies, most notably IEEE 802.1 lx WLAN technologies generally referred to as ’Wi-Fi.” Example systems of this type include different variants of CDMA systems, TDMA systems, FDMA systems, orthogonal FDMA (OFDMA) systems, single-carrier FDMA (SC-FDMA) systems, and so on.
[0075] Note that although FIG. 1 only illustrates two of the UEs as SL-UEs (i.e., UEs 164 and 182), any of the illustrated UEs may be SL-UEs. Further, although only UE 182 was described as being capable of beamforming, any of the illustrated UEs, including UE 164, may be capable of beamforming. Where SL-UEs are capable of beamforming, they may beamform towards each other (i.e., towards other SL-UEs), towards other UEs (e.g., UEs 104). towards base stations (e.g., base stations 102, 180, small cell 102’. access point 150), etc. Thus, in some cases, UEs 1 4 and 182 may utilize beamforming over sidelink 160.
[0076] In the example of FIG. 1, any of the illustrated UEs (shown in FIG. 1 as a single UE 104 for simplicity) may receive signals 124 from one or more Earth orbiting space vehicles (SVs) 1 12 (e.g., satellites). In an aspect, the SVs 1 12 may be part of a satellite positioning system that a UE 104 can use as an independent source of location information. A satellite positioning system typically includes a system of transmitters (e.g., SVs 112) positioned to enable receivers (e.g., UEs 104) to determine their location on or above the Earth based, at least in part, on positioning signals (e.g., signals 124) received from the transmitters. Such a transmitter ty pically transmits a signal marked with a repeating pseudo-random noise (PN) code of a set number of chips. While typically located in SVs 112, transmitters may sometimes be located on ground-based control stations, base stations 102, and/or other UEs 104. A UE 104 may include one or more dedicated receivers specifically designed to receive signals 124 for deriving geo location information from the SVs 112.
[0077] In a satellite positioning system, the use of signals 124 can be augmented by various satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS) that may be associated with or otherwise enabled for use with one or more global and/or regional navigation satellite systems. For example an SBAS may include an augmentation system(s) that provides integrity information, differential corrections, etc., such as the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS), the European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), the Multi-
functional Satellite Augmentation System (MS AS), the Global Positioning System (GPS) Aided Geo Augmented Navigation or GPS and Geo Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN). and/or the like. Thus, as used herein, a satellite positioning system may include any combination of one or more global and/or regional navigation satellites associated with such one or more satellite positioning systems.
[0078] In an aspect, SVs 112 may additionally or alternatively be part of one or more nonterrestrial networks (NTNs). In an NTN, an SV 112 is connected to an earth station (also referred to as a ground station, NTN gateway, or gateway), which in turn is connected to an element in a 5G network, such as a modified base station 102 (without a terrestrial antenna) or a network node in a 5GC. This element would in turn provide access to other elements in the 5G network and ultimately to entities external to the 5G network, such as Internet web servers and other user devices. In that way, a UE 104 may receive communication signals (e.g., signals 124) from an SV 112 instead of, or in addition to, communication signals from a terrestrial base station 102.
[0079] The wireless communications system 100 may further include one or more UEs, such as UE 190, that connects indirectly to one or more communication networks via one or more device-to-device (D2D) peer-to-peer (P2P) links (referred to as “sidelinks”). In the example of FIG. 1, UE 190 has a D2D P2P link 192 with one of the UEs 104 connected to one of the base stations 102 (e g., through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain cellular connectivity) and a D2D P2P link 194 with WLAN STA 152 connected to the WLAN AP 150 (through which UE 190 may indirectly obtain WLAN-based Internet connectivity). In an example, the D2D P2P links 192 and 194 may be supported with any well-known D2D RAT, such as LTE Direct (LTE-D), WI-FI DIRECT®, BLUETOOTH®, and so on.
[0080] FIG. 2A illustrates an example wireless network structure 200. For example, a 5GC 210 (also referred to as a Next Generation Core (NGC)) can be viewed functionally as control plane (C-plane) functions 214 (e.g., UE registration, authentication, network access, gateway selection, etc.) and user plane (U-plane) functions 212, (e.g., UE gateway function, access to data networks. IP routing, etc.) which operate cooperatively to form the core network. User plane interface (NG-U) 213 and control plane interface (NG-C) 215 connect the gNB 222 to the 5GC 210 and specifically to the user plane functions 212 and control plane functions 214, respectively. In an additional configuration, an ng-eNB
224 may also be connected to the 5GC 210 via NG-C 215 to the control plane functions 214 and NG-U 213 to user plane functions 212. Further, ng-eNB 224 may directly communicate with gNB 222 via a backhaul connection 223. In some configurations, a Next Generation RAN (NG-RAN) 220 may have one or more gNBs 222, while other configurations include one or more of both ng-eNBs 224 and gNBs 222. Either (or both) gNB 222 or ng-eNB 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein).
[0081] Another optional aspect may include a location server 230, which may be in communication with the 5GC 210 to provide location assistance for UE(s) 204. The location server 230 can be implemented as a plurality7 of separate servers (e.g., physically separate serv ers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical serv ers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server. The location server 230 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the location server 230 via the core network, 5GC 210, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). Further, the location server 230 may be integrated into a component of the core network, or alternatively may7 be external to the core network (e.g., a third party server, such as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) server or service server).
[0082] FIG. 2B illustrates another example wireless network structure 240. A 5GC 260 (which may correspond to 5GC 210 in FIG. 2A) can be viewed functionally as control plane functions, provided by an access and mobility management function (AMF) 264, and user plane functions, provided by a user plane function (UPF) 262, which operate cooperatively to form the core network (i.e., 5GC 260). The functions of the AMF 264 include registration management, connection management, reachability management, mobility management, lawful interception, transport for session management (SM) messages between one or more UEs 204 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) and a session management function (SMF) 266, transparent proxy services for routing SM messages, access authentication and access authorization, transport for short message service (SMS) messages between the UE 204 and the short message service function (SMSF) (not shown), and security anchor functionality (SEAF). The AMF 264 also interacts with an authentication server function (AUSF) (not shown) and the UE 204, and receives the intermediate key that was established as a result of the UE 204 authentication
process. In the case of authentication based on a UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system) subscriber identity module (USIM), the AMF 264 retrieves the security material from the AUSF. The functions of the AMF 264 also include security context management (SCM). The SCM receives a key from the SEAF that it uses to derive access-network specific keys. The functionality of the AMF 264 also includes location services management for regulatory services, transport for location services messages between the UE 204 and a location management function (LMF) 270 (which acts as a location server 230), transport for location services messages between the NG-RAN 220 and the LMF 270, evolved packet system (EPS) bearer identifier allocation for interworking with the EPS, and UE 204 mobility event notification. In addition, the AMF 264 also supports functionalities for non-3GPP® (Third Generation Partnership Project) access networks.
[0083] Functions of the UPF 262 include acting as an anchor point for intra/inter-RAT mobility (when applicable), acting as an external protocol data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to a data network (not shown), providing packet routing and for arding, packet inspection, user plane policy rule enforcement (e.g.. gating, redirection, traffic steering), lawful interception (user plane collection), traffic usage reporting, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., uplink/ downlink rate enforcement, reflective QoS marking in the downlink), uplink traffic verification (service data flow (SDF) to QoS flow mapping), transport level packet marking in the uplink and downlink, downlink packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering, and sending and forwarding of one or more "end markers” to the source RAN node. The UPF 262 may also support transfer of location services messages over a user plane between the UE 204 and a location server, such as an SLP 272.
[0084] The functions of the SMF 266 include session management. UE Internet protocol (IP) address allocation and management, selection and control of user plane functions, configuration of traffic steering at the UPF 262 to route traffic to the proper destination, control of part of policy enforcement and QoS, and downlink data notification. The interface over which the SMF 266 communicates with the AMF 264 is referred to as the Ni l interface.
[0085] Another optional aspect may include an LMF 270, which may be in communication with the 5GC 260 to provide location assistance for UEs 204. The LMF 270 can be
implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server. The LMF 270 can be configured to support one or more location services for UEs 204 that can connect to the LMF 270 via the core network, 5GC 260, and/or via the Internet (not illustrated). The SLP 272 may support similar functions to the LMF 270, but whereas the LMF 270 may communicate with the AMF 264, NG-RAN 220, and UEs 204 over a control plane (e.g., using interfaces and protocols intended to convey signaling messages and not voice or data), the SLP 272 may communicate with UEs 204 and external clients (e.g., third-party server 274) over a user plane (e.g., using protocols intended to carryvoice and/or data like the transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or IP).
[0086] Yet another optional aspect may include a third-party server 274. which may be in communication with the LMF 270, the SLP 272, the 5GC 260 (e.g., via the AMF 264 and/or the UPF 262), the NG-RAN 220, and/or the UE 204 to obtain location information (e.g., a location estimate) for the UE 204. As such, in some cases, the third-party server 274 may be referred to as a location services (LCS) client or an external client. The third- party server 274 can be implemented as a plurality of separate servers (e.g., physically separate servers, different software modules on a single server, different software modules spread across multiple physical servers, etc.), or alternately may each correspond to a single server.
[0087] User plane interface 263 and control plane interface 265 connect the 5GC 260, and specifically the UPF 262 and AMF 264, respectively, to one or more gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 in the NG-RAN 220. The interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the AMF 264 is referred to as the LCN2” interface, and the interface between gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 and the UPF 262 is referred to as the ”N3‘' interface. The gNB(s) 222 and/or ng-eNB(s) 224 of the NG-RAN 220 may communicate directly with each other via backhaul connections 223, referred to as the “Xn-C” interface. One or more of gNBs 222 and/or ng-eNBs 224 may communicate with one or more UEs 204 over a wireless interface, referred to as the "Uu ’ interface.
[0088] The functionality- of a gNB 222 may be divided between a gNB central unit (gNB-CU) 226, one or more gNB distributed units (gNB-DUs) 228, and one or more gNB radio units (gNB-RUs) 229. A gNB-CU 226 is a logical node that includes the base station functions
of transferring user data, mobility' control, radio access network sharing, positioning, session management, and the like, except for those functions allocated exclusively to the gNB-DU(s) 228. More specifically, the gNB-CU 226 generally host the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) protocols of the gNB 222. A gNB-DU 228 is a logical node that generally hosts the radio link control (RLC) and medium access control (MAC) layer of the gNB 222. Its operation is controlled by the gNB-CU 226. One gNB-DU 228 can support one or more cells, and one cell is supported by only one gNB-DU 228. The interface 232 between the gNB-CU 226 and the one or more gNB-DUs 228 is referred to as the “FU‘ interface. The physical (PHY) layer functionality of a gNB 222 is generally- hosted by one or more standalone gNB-RUs 229 that perform functions such as power amplification and signal transmission/reception. The interface between a gNB-DU 228 and a gNB-RU 229 is referred to as the “Fx” interface. Thus, a UE 204 communicates with the gNB-CU 226 via the RRC, SDAP, and PDCP layers, with a gNB-DU 228 via the RLC and MAC layers, and with a gNB-RU 229 via the PHY layer.
[0089] Deployment of communication systems, such as 5G NR systems, may be arranged in multiple manners with various components or constituent parts. In a 5G NR system, or network, a network node, a network entity, a mobility element of a network, a RAN node, a core network node, a network element, or a network equipment, such as a base station, or one or more units (or one or more components) performing base station functionality, may be implemented in an aggregated or disaggregated architecture. For example, a base station (such as a Node B (NB), evolved NB (eNB), NR base station, 5GNB, access point (AP), a transmit receive point (TRP), or a cell, etc.) may be implemented as an aggregated base station (also known as a standalone base station or a monolithic base station) or a disaggregated base station.
[0090] An aggregated base station may be configured to utilize a radio protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated wi thin a single RAN node. A disaggregated base station may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more units (such as one or more central or centralized units (CUs), one or more distributed units (DUs), or one or more radio units (RUs)). In some aspects, a CU may be implemented within a RAN node, and one or more DUs may be co-located with the CU, or alternatively, may be geographically or virtually distributed throughout one or
multiple other RAN nodes. The DUs may be implemented to communicate with one or more RUs. Each of the CU, DU and RU also can be implemented as virtual units, i.e.. a virtual central unit (VCU). a virtual distributed unit (VDU), or a virtual radio unit (VRU). [0091] Base station-type operation or network design may consider aggregation characteristics of base station functionality. For example, disaggregated base stations may be utilized in an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open radio access network (0-RAN (such as the network configuration sponsored by the 0-RAN ALLIANCE®)), or a virtualized radio access network (vRAN, also known as a cloud radio access network (C- RAN)). Disaggregation may include distributing functionality across two or more units at various physical locations, as well as distributing functionality for at least one unit virtually, which can enable flexibility in network design. The various units of the disaggregated base station, or disaggregated RAN architecture, can be configured for wired or wireless communication with at least one other unit.
[0092] FIG. 2C illustrates an example disaggregated base station architecture 250, according to aspects of the disclosure. The disaggregated base station architecture 250 may include one or more central units (CUs) 280 (e.g.. gNB-CU 226) that can communicate directly with a core network 267 (e.g., 5GC 210, 5GC 260) via a backhaul link, or indirectly with the core network 267 through one or more disaggregated base station units (such as a Near-Real Time (Near-RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 259 via an E2 link, or a Non-Real Time (Non-RT) RIC 257 associated with a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) Framework 255, or both). A CU 280 may communicate with one or more DUs 285 (e.g., gNB-DUs 228) via respective midhaul links, such as an Fl interface. The DUs 285 may communicate with one or more radio units (RUs) 287 (e.g., gNB-RUs 229) via respective fronthaul links. The RUs 287 may communicate with respective UEs 204 via one or more radio frequency (RF) access links. In some implementations, the UE 204 may be simultaneously served by multiple RUs 287.
[0093] Each of the units, i.e., the CUs 280, the DUs 285, the RUs 287, as well as the Near-RT RICs 259, the Non-RT RICs 257 and the SMO Framework 255, may include one or more interfaces or be coupled to one or more interfaces configured to receive or transmit signals, data, or information (collectively, signals) via a wired or wireless transmission medium. Each of the units, or an associated processor or controller providing instructions to the communication interfaces of the units, can be configured to communicate with one
or more of the other units via the transmission medium. For example, the units can include a wired interface configured to receive or transmit signals over a wired transmission medium to one or more of the other units. Additionally, the units can include a wireless interface, which may include a receiver, a transmitter or transceiver (such as a RF transceiver), configured to receive or transmit signals, or both, over a wireless transmission medium to one or more of the other units.
[0094] In some aspects, the CU 280 may host one or more higher layer control functions. Such control functions can include RRC, PDCP, service data adaptation protocol (SDAP), or the like. Each control function can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other control functions hosted by the CU 280. The CU 280 may be configured to handle user plane functionality (i. e. , Central Unit - User Plane (CU- UP)). control plane functionality (i.e.. Central Unit - Control Plane (CU-CP)). or a combination thereof. In some implementations, the CU 280 can be logically split into one or more CU-UP units and one or more CU-CP units. The CU-UP unit can communicate bidirectionally with the CU-CP unit via an interface, such as the El interface when implemented in an O-RAN configuration. The CU 280 can be implemented to communicate with the DU 285, as necessary, for network control and signaling.
[0095] The DU 285 may correspond to a logical unit that includes one or more base station functions to control the operation of one or more RUs 287. In some aspects, the DU 285 may host one or more of a RLC layer, a MAC layer, and one or more high PHY layers (such as modules for forward error correction (FEC) encoding and decoding, scrambling, modulation and demodulation, or the like) depending, at least in part, on a functional split, such as those defined by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP®). In some aspects, the DU 285 may further host one or more low PHY layers. Each layer (or module) can be implemented with an interface configured to communicate signals with other layers (and modules) hosted by the DU 285, or with the control functions hosted by the CU 280.
[0096] Lower-layer functionality can be implemented by one or more RUs 287. In some deployments, an RU 287, controlled by a DU 285, may correspond to a logical node that hosts RF processing functions, or low-PHY layer functions (such as performing fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse FFT (iFFT), digital beamforming, phy sical random
access channel (PRACH) extraction and filtering, or the like), or both, based at least in part on the functional split, such as a lower layer functional split. In such an architecture, the RU(s) 287 can be implemented to handle over the air (OTA) communication with one or more UEs 204. In some implementations, real-time and non-real-time aspects of control and user plane communication with the RU(s) 287 can be controlled by the corresponding DU 285. In some scenarios, this configuration can enable the DU(s) 285 and the CU 280 to be implemented in a cloud-based RAN architecture, such as a vRAN architecture.
[0097] The SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support RAN deployment and provisioning of non-virtualized and virtualized network elements. For non-virtualized network elements, the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to support the deployment of dedicated physical resources for RAN coverage requirements which may be managed via an operations and maintenance interface (such as an 01 interface). For virtualized network elements, the SMO Framework 255 may be configured to interact with a cloud computing platform (such as an open cloud (O-Cloud) 269) to perform network element life cycle management (such as to instantiate virtualized network elements) via a cloud computing platform interface (such as an 02 interface). Such virtualized network elements can include, but are not limited to, CUs 280, DUs 285, RUs 287 and Near-RT RICs 259. In some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate with a hardware aspect of a 4G RAN. such as an open eNB (O-eNB) 261. via an 01 interface. Additionally, in some implementations, the SMO Framework 255 can communicate directly with one or more RUs 287 via an 01 interface. The SMO Framework 255 also may include aNon-RT RIC 257 configured to support functionality of the SMO Framework 255.
[0098] The Non-RT RIC 257 may be configured to include a logical function that enables non- real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources, artificial intelligence/machine learning (AI/ML) workflows including model training and updates, or policy-based guidance of applications/features in the Near-RT RIC 259. The Non-RT RIC 257 may be coupled to or communicate with (such as via an Al interface) the Near- RT RIC 259. The Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to include a logical function that enables near-real-time control and optimization of RAN elements and resources via data collection and actions over an interface (such as via an E2 interface) connecting one or
more CUs 280, one or more DUs 285, or both, as well as an O-eNB, with the Near-RT RIC 259.
[0099] In some implementations, to generate AI/ML models to be deployed in the Near-RT RIC 259, the Non-RT RIC 257 may receive parameters or external enrichment information from external servers. Such information may be utilized by the Near-RT RIC 259 and may be received at the SMO Framework 255 or the Non-RT RIC 257 from non-network data sources or from network functions. In some examples, the Non-RT RIC 257 or the Near-RT RIC 259 may be configured to tune RAN behavior or performance. For example, the Non-RT RIC 257 may monitor long-term trends and patterns for performance and employ AI/ML models to perform corrective actions through the SMO Framework 255 (such as reconfiguration via 01) or via creation of RAN management policies (such as Al policies).
[0100] FIGS. 3 A, 3B, and 3C illustrate several example components (represented by corresponding blocks) that may be incorporated into a UE 302 (which may correspond to any of the UEs described herein), a base station 304 (which may correspond to any of the base stations described herein), and a network entity 306 (which may correspond to or embody any of the network functions described herein, including the location server 230 and the LMF 270, or alternatively may be independent from the NG-RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260 infrastructure depicted in FIGS. 2A and 2B, such as a private network) to support the operations described herein. It will be appreciated that these components may be implemented in different types of apparatuses in different implementations (e.g., in an ASIC, in a system-on-chip (SoC), etc.). The illustrated components may also be incorporated into other apparatuses in a communication system. For example, other apparatuses in a system may include components similar to those described to provide similar functionality. Also, a given apparatus may contain one or more of the components. For example, an apparatus may include multiple transceiver components that enable the apparatus to operate on multiple carriers and/or communicate via different technologies.
[0101] The UE 302 and the base station 304 each include one or more wireless wide area network (WWAN) transceivers 310 and 350, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means fortuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) via one or more wireless communication networks (not shown), such as an NR network, an LTE network, a GSM network, and/or
the like. The WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may each be connected to one or more antennas 316 and 356, respectively, for communicating with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations (e.g.. eNBs. gNBs), etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., NR, LTE, GSM, etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest (e.g., some set of time/frequency resources in a particular frequency spectrum). The WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358 (e.g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT. Specifically, the WWAN transceivers 310 and 350 include one or more transmitters 314 and 354, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 318 and 358, respectively, and one or more receivers 312 and 352. respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 318 and 358, respectively.
[0102] The UE 302 and the base station 304 each also include, at least in some cases, one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360, respectively. The short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be connected to one or more antennas 326 and 366, respectively, and provide means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, means for measuring, means for tuning, means for refraining from transmitting, etc.) with other network nodes, such as other UEs, access points, base stations, etc., via at least one designated RAT (e.g., Wi-Fi. LTE Direct, BLUETOOTH®. ZIGBEE®, Z-WAVE®, PC5, dedicated short-range communications (DSRC), wireless access for vehicular environments (WAVE), near-field communication (NFC), ultra- wideband (UWB), etc.) over a wireless communication medium of interest. The short- range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be variously configured for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368 (e.g., messages, indications, information, and so on), respectively, and, conversely, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368 (e g., messages, indications, information, pilots, and so on), respectively, in accordance with the designated RAT. Specifically, the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 include one or more transmitters 324 and 364, respectively, for transmitting and encoding signals 328 and 368, respectively, and one or more receivers 322 and 362, respectively, for receiving and decoding signals 328 and 368, respectively. As specific examples, the short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360 may be Wi-Fi transceivers,
BLUETOOTH® transceivers, ZIGBEE® and/or Z-WAVE® transceivers, NFC transceivers, UWB transceivers, or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) and/or vehicle-to- everything (V2X) transceivers.
[0103] The UE 302 and the base station 304 also include, at least in some cases, satellite signal transceivers 330 and 370, which include satellite receiver(s) 330-1 and/or 370-1, respectiely. and/or satellite transmitter(s) 330-2 and/or 370-2, respectiely. In some designs, the satellite signal Transceivers’ may alternatively be implemented as Rx-only satellite receivers or Tx-only satellite transmitters. In some designs, the base station 304 is a terrestrial base station which may communicate with satellite(s) via the satellite signal transceiver(s). In other designs, the base station 304 may itself be a satellite (or nonterrestrial entity) which uses the satellite signal transceiver(s) 370 to communicate with terrestrial networks and/or other satellites.
[0104] The satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for receiving and/or measuring satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively. Where the satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 are satellite positioning system receivers, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS®) signals, Galileo signals, Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), QuasiZenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc. Where the satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370- 1 are non-terrestrial network (NTN) receivers, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network. The satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for receiving and processing satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378. respectively. The satellite signal receivers 330-1 and 370-1 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and, at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements obtained by any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
[0105] The satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may be connected to one or more antennas 336 and 376, respectively, and may provide means for transmitting satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively. Where the satellite signal
transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 are satellite positioning system transmitters, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be global positioning system (GPS) signals, global navigation satellite system (GLONASS®) signals, Galileo signals. Beidou signals, Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (NAVIC), Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS), etc. Where the satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370 are nonterrestrial network (NTN) transmitters, the satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378 may be communication signals (e.g., carrying control and/or user data) originating from a 5G network. The satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may comprise any suitable hardware and/or software for transmitting satellite positioning/communication signals 338 and 378, respectively. The satellite signal transmitters 330-2 and 370-2 may request information and operations as appropriate from the other systems, and. at least in some cases, perform calculations to determine locations of the UE 302 and the base station 304, respectively, using measurements transmitted to/from any suitable satellite positioning system algorithm.
[0106] The base station 304 and the network entity 306 each include one or more network transceivers 380 and 390, respectively, providing means for communicating (e.g., means for transmitting, means for receiving, etc.) with other network entities (e.g., other base stations 304, other network entities 306). For example, the base station 304 may employ the one or more network transceivers 380 to communicate with other base stations 304 or network entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links. As another example, the network entity 306 may employ the one or more network transceivers 390 to communicate with one or more base station 304 over one or more wired or wireless backhaul links, or with other netw ork entities 306 over one or more wired or wireless core network interfaces.
[0107] A transceiver may be configured to communicate over a wired or wireless link. A transceiver (whether a wired transceiver or a wireless transceiver) includes transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324, 354, 364) and receiver circuitry (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362). A transceiver may be an integrated device (e.g., embodying transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry in a single device) in some implementations, may comprise separate transmitter circuitry and separate receiver circuitry in some implementations, or may be embodied in other ways in other implementations. The transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry of a wired transceiver (e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some
implementations) may be coupled to one or more wired network interface ports. Wireless transmitter circuitry (e.g., transmitters 314, 324. 354, 364) may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316. 326, 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g., UE 302, base station 304) to perform transmit “beamforming,” as described herein. Similarly, wireless receiver circuitry' (e.g., receivers 312, 322, 352, 362) may include or be coupled to a plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316, 326. 356, 366), such as an antenna array, that permits the respective apparatus (e.g.. UE 302, base station 304) to perform receive beamforming, as described herein. In an aspect, the transmitter circuitry and receiver circuitry may share the same plurality of antennas (e.g., antennas 316. 326, 356, 366), such that the respective apparatus can only- receive or transmit at a given time, not both at the same time. A wireless transceiver (e.g., WWAN transceivers 310 and 350, short-range wireless transceivers 320 and 360) may also include a network listen module (NLM) or the like for performing various measurements.
[0108] As used herein, the various wireless transceivers (e.g., transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, and network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations) and wired transceivers (e.g., network transceivers 380 and 390 in some implementations) may generally be characterized as “a transceiver,” “at least one transceiver,” or “one or more transceivers.” As such, whether a particular transceiver is a wired or wireless transceiver may be inferred from the ty pe of communication performed. For example, backhaul communication between network devices or servers will generally relate to signaling via a wired transceiver, whereas wireless communication between a UE (e.g., UE 302) and a base station (e.g., base station 304) will generally relate to signaling via a wireless transceiver.
[0109] The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 also include other components that may be used in conjunction with the operations as disclosed herein. The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity- 306 include one or more processors 332, 384, and 394, respectively, for providing functionality- relating to, for example, wireless communication, and for providing other processing functionality. The processors 332, 384, and 394 may therefore provide means for processing, such as means for determining, means for calculating, means for receiving, means for transmitting, means for indicating, etc. In an aspect, the processors 332, 384, and 394 may include, for
example, one or more general purpose processors, multi-core processors, central processing units (CPUs), ASICs, digital signal processors (DSPs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs). other programmable logic devices or processing circuitry, or various combinations thereof.
[0110] The UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 include memory circuitry7 implementing memories 340, 386, and 396 (e.g., each including a memory7 device), respectively, for maintaining information (e.g., information indicative of reserved resources, thresholds, parameters, and so on). The memories 340, 386, and 396 may therefore provide means for storing, means for retrieving, means for maintaining, etc. In some cases, the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may include Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398, respectively. The Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be hardware circuits that are part of or coupled to the processors 332. 384. and 394, respectively, that, when executed, cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein. In other aspects, the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be external to the processors 332, 384, and 394 (e.g., part of a modem processing system, integrated with another processing system, etc.). Alternatively, the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398 may be memory7 modules stored in the memories 340, 386, and 396, respectively, that, when executed by the processors 332, 384, and 394 (or a modem processing system, another processing sy stem, etc.), cause the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 to perform the functionality described herein. FIG. 3A illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 342, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the memory 340, the one or more processors 332, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component. FIG. 3B illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 388, which may be, for example, part of the one or more WWAN transceivers 350, the memory7 386, the one or more processors 384, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component. FIG. 3C illustrates possible locations of the Rx-Tx component 398, which may be, for example, part of the one or more network transceivers 390, the memory 396. the one or more processors 394, or any combination thereof, or may be a standalone component.
[0111] The UE 302 may include one or more sensors 344 coupled to the one or more processors 332 to provide means for sensing or detecting movement and/or orientation information
that is independent of motion data derived from signals received by the one or more WWAN transceivers 310, the one or more short-range wireless transceivers 320, and/or the satellite signal receiver 330. By way of example, the sensor(s) 344 may include an accelerometer (e.g., a micro-electrical mechanical systems (MEMS) device), a gyroscope, a geomagnetic sensor (e.g., a compass), an altimeter (e.g., a barometric pressure altimeter), and/or any other type of movement detection sensor. Moreover, the sensor(s) 344 may include a plurality of different types of devices and combine their outputs in order to provide motion information. For example, the sensor(s) 344 may use a combination of a multi-axis accelerometer and orientation sensors to provide the ability to compute positions in two-dimensional (2D) and/or three-dimensional (3D) coordinate systems.
[0112] In addition, the UE 302 includes a user interface 346 providing means for providing indications (e.g., audible and/or visual indications) to a user and/or for receiving user input (e.g., upon user actuation of a sensing device such a keypad, a touch screen, a microphone, and so on). Although not shown, the base station 304 and the network entity 306 may also include user interfaces.
[0113] Referring to the one or more processors 384 in more detail, in the downlink. IP packets from the network entity 306 may be provided to the processor 384. The one or more processors 384 may implement functionality for an RRC layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, and a medium access control (MAC) layer. The one or more processors 384 may provide RRC layer functionality associated with broadcasting of system information (e.g., master information block (MIB), system information blocks (SIBs)), RRC connection control (e.g., RRC connection paging, RRC connection establishment, RRC connection modification, and RRC connection release), inter-RAT mobility, and measurement configuration for UE measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, security’ (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification), and handover support functions; RLC layer functionality associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs. error correction through automatic repeat request (ARQ), concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC service data units (SDUs), re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and
transport channels, scheduling information reporting, error correction, priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
[0114] The transmitter 354 and the receiver 352 may implement Layer-1 (LI) functionality associated with various signal processing functions. Layer-1, which includes a physical (PHY) layer, may include error detection on the transport channels, forward error correction (FEC) coding/decoding of the transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping onto physical channels, modulation/demodulation of physical channels, and MIMO antenna processing. The transmitter 354 handles mapping to signal constellations based on various modulation schemes (e.g., binary phase-shift keying (BPSK), quadrature phase-shift keying (QPSK), M-phase-shift keying (M-PSK), M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM)). The coded and modulated symbols may then be split into parallel streams. Each stream may then be mapped to an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (e.g., pilot) in the time and/or frequency domain, and then combined together using an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) to produce a physical channel carrying a time domain OFDM symbol stream. The OFDM symbol stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams. Channel estimates from a channel estimator may be used to determine the coding and modulation scheme, as well as for spatial processing. The channel estimate may be derived from a reference signal and/or channel condition feedback transmitted by the UE 302. Each spatial stream may then be provided to one or more different antennas 356. The transmitter 354 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
[0115] At the UE 302, the receiver 312 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 316. The receiver 312 recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 332. The transmitter 314 and the receiver 312 implement Layer- 1 functionality associated with various signal processing functions. The receiver 312 may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial streams destined for the UE 302. If multiple spatial streams are destined for the UE 302, they may be combined by the receiver 312 into a single OFDM symbol stream. The receiver 312 then converts the OFDM symbol stream from the time-domain to the frequency domain using a fast Fourier transform (FFT). The frequency domain signal comprises a separate OFDM symbol stream for each subcarrier of the OFDM signal. The
symbols on each subcarrier, and the reference signal, are recovered and demodulated bydetermining the most likely signal constellation points transmitted by the base station 304. These soft decisions may be based on channel estimates computed by a channel estimator. The soft decisions are then decoded and de-interleaved to recover the data and control signals that were originally transmitted by the base station 304 on the physical channel. The data and control signals are then provided to the one or more processors 332, which implements Layer-3 (L3) and Layer-2 (L2) functionality.
[0116] In the downlink, the one or more processors 332 provides demultiplexing between transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, and control signal processing to recover IP packets from the core network. The one or more processors 332 are also responsible for error detection.
[0117] Similar to the functionality described in connection with the downlink transmission by the base station 304, the one or more processors 332 provides RRC layer functionality associated with system information (e.g., MIB, SIBs) acquisition, RRC connections, and measurement reporting; PDCP layer functionality associated with header compression/decompression, and security (ciphering, deciphering, integrity protection, integrity verification); RLC layer functionality- associated with the transfer of upper layer PDUs, error correction through ARQ, concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs, re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs, and reordering of RLC data PDUs; and MAC layer functionality associated with mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing of MAC SDUs onto transport blocks (TBs), demultiplexing of MAC SDUs from TBs, scheduling information reporting, error correction through hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), priority handling, and logical channel prioritization.
[0118] Channel estimates derived by the channel estimator from a reference signal or feedback transmitted by the base station 304 may be used by the transmitter 314 to select the appropriate coding and modulation schemes, and to facilitate spatial processing. The spatial streams generated by the transmitter 314 may be provided to different antenna(s) 316. The transmitter 314 may modulate an RF carrier with a respective spatial stream for transmission.
[0119] The uplink transmission is processed at the base station 304 in a manner similar to that described in connection with the receiver function at the UE 302. The receiver 352 receives a signal through its respective antenna(s) 356. The receiver 352 recovers
information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides the information to the one or more processors 384.
[0120] In the uplink, the one or more processors 384 provides demultiplexing betw een transport and logical channels, packet reassembly, deciphering, header decompression, control signal processing to recover IP packets from the UE 302. IP packets from the one or more processors 384 may be provided to the core network. The one or more processors 384 are also responsible for error detection.
[0121] For convenience, the UE 302, the base station 304, and/or the network entity 306 are shown in FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C as including various components that may be configured according to the various examples described herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the illustrated components may have different functionality in different designs. In particular, various components in FIGS. 3A to 3C are optional in alternative configurations and the various aspects include configurations that may vary due to design choice, costs, use of the device, or other considerations. For example, in case of FIG. 3A, a particular implementation of UE 302 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 310 (e.g., a wearable device or tablet computer or personal computer (PC) or laptop may have Wi-Fi and/or BLUETOOTH® capability without cellular capability), or may omit the short- range wireless transceiver(s) 320 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 330, or may omit the sensor(s) 344, and so on. In another example, in case of FIG. 3B. a particular implementation of the base station 304 may omit the WWAN transceiver(s) 350 (e.g., a Wi-Fi ‘'hotspot” access point without cellular capability), or may omit the short-range wireless transceiver(s) 360 (e.g., cellular-only, etc.), or may omit the satellite signal receiver 370, and so on. For brevity, illustration of the various alternative configurations is not provided herein, but would be readily understandable to one skilled in the art.
[0122] The various components of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306 may be communicatively coupled to each other over data buses 334, 382, and 392, respectively. In an aspect, the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may form, or be part of, a communication interface of the UE 302, the base station 304, and the network entity 306. respectively. For example, where different logical entities are embodied in the same device (e.g., gNB and location server functionality incorporated into the same base station 304), the data buses 334, 382, and 392 may provide communication between them.
[0123] The components of FIGS. 3A, 3B, and 3C may be implemented in various ways. In some implementations, the components of FIGS. 3 A, 3B. and 3C may be implemented in one or more circuits such as. for example, one or more processors and/or one or more ASICs (which may include one or more processors). Here, each circuit may use and/or incorporate at least one memory component for storing information or executable code used by the circuit to provide this functionality. For example, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 310 to 346 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the UE 302 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). Similarly, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 350 to 388 may be implemented by processor and memory component(s) of the base station 304 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). Also, some or all of the functionality represented by blocks 390 to 398 may be implemented by processor and memory7 component(s) of the network entity7 306 (e.g., by execution of appropriate code and/or by appropriate configuration of processor components). For simplicity7, various operations, acts, and/or functions are described herein as being performed “by a UE,” “by a base station,” “by a network entity,” etc. However, as will be appreciated, such operations, acts, and/or functions may actually be performed by specific components or combinations of components of the UE 302, base station 304, network entity 306, etc., such as the processors 332, 384, 394. the transceivers 310, 320, 350, and 360, the memories 340, 386, and 396, the Rx-Tx component 342, 388, and 398, etc.
[0124] In some designs, the network entity7 306 may7 be implemented as a core network component. In other designs, the network entity 306 may be distinct from a network operator or operation of the cellular network infrastructure (e.g., NG RAN 220 and/or 5GC 210/260). For example, the network entity 306 may be a component of a private network that may be configured to communicate with the UE 302 via the base station 304 or independently from the base station 304 (e.g., over a non-cellular communication link, such as Wi-Fi).
[0125] Various frame structures may be used to support downlink and uplink transmissions between network nodes (e.g., base stations and UEs). FIG. 4 is a diagram 400 illustrating an example frame structure, according to aspects of the disclosure. The frame structure
may be a downlink or uplink frame structure. Other wireless communications technologies may have different frame structures and/or different channels.
[0126] LTE. and in some cases NR, utilizes orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink and single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM) on the uplink. Unlike LTE, however, NR has an option to use OFDM on the uplink as well. OFDM and SC-FDM partition the system bandwidth into multiple (K) orthogonal subcarriers, which are also commonly referred to as tones, bins. etc. Each subcarrier may be modulated with data. In general, modulation symbols are sent in the frequency domain with OFDM and in the time domain with SC-FDM. The spacing between adjacent subcarriers may be fixed, and the total number of subcarriers (K) may be dependent on the system bandwidth. For example, the spacing of the subcarriers may be 15 kilohertz (kHz) and the minimum resource allocation (resource block) may be 12 subcarriers (or 180 kHz). Consequently, the nominal fast Fourier transform (FFT) size may be equal to 128, 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, or 20 megahertz (MHz), respectively. The system bandwidth may also be partitioned into subbands. For example, a subband may cover 1.08 MHz (i.e., 6 resource blocks), and there may be 1, 2. 4, 8, or 16 subbands for system bandwidth of 1.25, 2.5, 5, 1 , or 20 MHz, respectively.
[0127] LTE supports a single numerology (subcarrier spacing (SCS), symbol length, etc.). In contrast, NR may support multiple numerologies (p), for example, subcarrier spacings of 15 kHz (p=0), 30 kHz (p=l). 60 kHz (p=2), 120 kHz (p=3), and 240 kHz (p=4) or greater may be available. In each subcarrier spacing, there are 14 symbols per slot. For 15 kHz SCS (p=0), there is one slot per subframe, 10 slots per frame, the slot duration is 1 millisecond (ms), the symbol duration is 66.7 microseconds (ps), and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 50. For 30 kHz SCS (p=l), there are two slots per subframe. 20 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.5 ms. the symbol duration is 33.3 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 100. For 60 kHz SCS (p=2), there are four slots per subframe, 40 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.25 ms, the symbol duration is 16.7 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 200. For 120 kHz SCS (p=3). there are eight slots per subframe, 80 slots per frame, the slot duration is 0.125 ms, the symbol duration is 8.33 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 400. For 240 kHz SCS (p=4), there are 16 slots per subframe, 160 slots
per frame, the slot duration is 0.0625 ms, the symbol duration is 4.17 ps, and the maximum nominal system bandwidth (in MHz) with a 4K FFT size is 800.
[0128] In the example of FIG. 4, a numerology of 15 kHz is used. Thus, in the time domain, a 10 ms frame is divided into 10 equally sized subframes of 1 ms each, and each subframe includes one time slot. In FIG. 4, time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top.
[0129] A resource grid may be used to represent time slots, each time slot including one or more time-concurrent resource blocks (RBs) (also referred to as physical RBs (PRBs)) in the frequency domain. The resource grid is further divided into multiple resource elements (REs). An RE may correspond to one symbol length in the time domain and one subcarrier in the frequency domain. In the numerology of FIG. 4, for a normal cyclic prefix, an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and seven consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 84 REs. For an extended cyclic prefix, an RB may contain 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain and six consecutive symbols in the time domain, for a total of 72 REs. The number of bits carried by each RE depends on the modulation scheme.
[0130] Some of the REs may cany' reference (pilot) signals (RS). The reference signals may include positioning reference signals (PRS), tracking reference signals (TRS), phase tracking reference signals (PTRS), cell-specific reference signals (CRS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), synchronization signal blocks (SSBs), sounding reference signals (SRS), etc., depending on whether the illustrated frame structure is used for uplink or downlink communication. FIG. 4 illustrates example locations of REs carrying a reference signal (labeled "R”).
[0131] FIG. 5 is a diagram 500 illustrating various downlink channels within an example downlink slot. In FIG. 5, time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top. In the example of FIG. 5. a numerology of 15 kHz is used. Thus, in the time domain, the illustrated slot is one millisecond (ms) in length, divided into 14 symbols.
[0132] In NR, the channel bandwidth, or system bandwidth, is divided into multiple bandwidth parts (BWPs). A BWP is a contiguous set of RBs selected from a contiguous subset of the common RBs for a given numerology on a given carrier. Generally, a maximum of four BWPs can be specified in the downlink and uplink. That is, a UE can be configured with up to four BWPs on the downlink, and up to four BWPs on the uplink. Only one BWP (uplink or downlink) may be active at a given time, meaning the UE may only receive or transmit over one BWP at a time. On the downlink, the bandwidth of each BWP should be equal to or greater than the bandwidth of the SSB, but it may or may not contain the SSB.
[0133] Referring to FIG. 5, a primary synchronization signal (PSS) is used by a UE to determine subframe/symbol timing and a physical layer identity. A secondary synchronization signal (SSS) is used by a UE to determine a physical layer cell identity group number and radio frame timing. Based on the physical layer identity and the physical layer cell identity7 group number, the UE can determine a PCI. Based on the PCI, the UE can determine the locations of the aforementioned DL-RS. The physical broadcast channel (PBCH), which carries a master information block (MIB). may be logically grouped with the PSS and SSS to form an SSB (also referred to as an SS/PBCH). The MIB provides a number of RBs in the downlink system bandwidth and a system frame number (SFN). The physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) carries user data, broadcast system information not transmitted through the PBCH, such as system information blocks (SIBs), and paging messages.
[0134] The physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) carries downlink control information (DCI) within one or more control channel elements (CCEs), each CCE including one or more RE group (REG) bundles (which may span multiple symbols in the time domain), each REG bundle including one or more REGs. each REG corresponding to 12 resource elements (one resource block) in the frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in the time domain. The set of physical resources used to carry' the PDCCH/DCI is referred to in NR as the control resource set (CORESET). In NR, a PDCCH is confined to a single CORESET and is transmitted with its own DMRS. This enables UE-specific beamforming for the PDCCH.
[0135] In the example of FIG. 5, there is one CORESET per BWP, and the CORESET spans three symbols (although it may be only one or two symbols) in the time domain. Unlike
LTE control channels, which occupy the entire system bandwidth, in NR, PDCCH channels are localized to a specific region in the frequency domain (i.e.. a CORESET). Thus, the frequency component of the PDCCH shown in FIG. 5 is illustrated as less than a single BWP in the frequency domain. Note that although the illustrated CORESET is contiguous in the frequency domain, it need not be. In addition, the CORESET may span less than three symbols in the time domain.
[0136] The DCI within the PDCCH carries information about uplink resource allocation (persistent and non-persistent) and descriptions about downlink data transmitted to the UE, referred to as uplink and downlink grants, respectively. More specifically, the DCI indicates the resources scheduled for the downlink data channel (e.g., PDSCH) and the uplink data channel (e.g., physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)). Multiple (e.g., up to eight) DCIs can be configured in the PDCCH. and these DC Is can have one of multiple formats. For example, there are different DCI formats for uplink scheduling, for downlink scheduling, for uplink transmit power control (TPC), etc. A PDCCH may be transported by 1 , 2, 4, 8, or 16 CCEs in order to accommodate different DCI pay load sizes or coding rates.
[0137] FIG. 6 is a diagram of an example PRS configuration 600 for the PRS transmissions of a given base station, according to aspects of the disclosure. In FIG. 6, time is represented horizontally, increasing from left to right. Each long rectangle represents a slot and each short (shaded) rectangle represents an OFDM symbol. In the example of FIG. 6, a PRS resource set 610 (labeled “PRS resource set 1”) includes two PRS resources, a first PRS resource 612 (labeled “PRS resource 1”) and a second PRS resource 614 (labeled “PRS resource 2”). The base station transmits PRS on the PRS resources 612 and 614 of the PRS resource set 610.
[0138] The PRS resource set 610 has an occasion length (N_PRS) of two slots and a periodicity (T_PRS) of, for example, 160 slots or 160 milliseconds (ms) (for 15 kHz subcarrier spacing). As such, both the PRS resources 612 and 614 are two consecutive slots in length and repeat every T_PRS slots, starting from the slot in which the first symbol of the respective PRS resource occurs. In the example of FIG. 6, the PRS resource 612 has a symbol length (N_symb) of two symbols, and the PRS resource 614 has a symbol length (N_symb) of four symbols. The PRS resource 612 and the PRS resource 614 may be transmitted on separate beams of the same base station.
[0139] Each instance of the PRS resource set 610, illustrated as instances 620a, 620b, and 620c, includes an occasion of length ‘2’ (i.e., N_PRS=2) for each PRS resource 612, 614 of the PRS resource set. The PRS resources 612 and 614 are repeated even’ T PRS slots up to the muting sequence periodicity T REP. As such, a bitmap of length T REP would be needed to indicate which occasions of instances 620a, 620b, and 620c of PRS resource set 610 are muted (i.e., not transmitted).
[0140] In an aspect, there may be additional constraints on the PRS configuration 600. For example, for all PRS resources (e.g., PRS resources 612, 614) of a PRS resource set (e.g., PRS resource set 610), the base station can configure the following parameters to be the same: (a) the occasion length (N_PRS), (b) the number of symbols (N_symb), (c) the comb type, and/or (d) the bandwidth. In addition, for all PRS resources of all PRS resource sets, the subcarrier spacing and the cyclic prefix can be configured to be the same for one base station or for all base stations. Whether it is for one base station or all base stations may depend on the UE’s capability to support the first and/or second option.
[0141] FIG. 7 is a diagram 700 illustrating various uplink channels within an example uplink slot. In FIG. 7. time is represented horizontally (on the X axis) with time increasing from left to right, while frequency is represented vertically (on the Y axis) with frequency increasing (or decreasing) from bottom to top. In the example of FIG. 7, a numerology of 15 kHz is used. Thus, in the time domain, the illustrated slot is one millisecond (ms) in length, divided into 14 symbols.
[0142] A random-access channel (RACH), also referred to as a physical random-access channel (PRACH), may be within one or more slots within a frame based on the PRACH configuration. The PRACH may include six consecutive RB pairs within a slot. The PRACH allows the UE to perform initial system access and achieve uplink synchronization. A physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) may be located on edges of the uplink system bandwidth. The PUCCH carries uplink control information (UCI), such as scheduling requests, CSI reports, a channel quality indicator (CQI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a rank indicator (RI). and HARQ ACK/NACK feedback. The physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) carries data, and may additionally be used to carry a buffer status report (BSR), a power headroom report (PHR), and/or UCI.
[0143] In an aspect, the reference signal carried on the REs labeled “R” in FIG. 4 may be SRS. SRS transmitted by a UE may be used by a base station to obtain the channel state
information (CSI) for the transmitting UE. CSI describes how an RF signal propagates from the UE to the base station and represents the combined effect of scattering, fading, and power decay with distance. The system uses the SRS for resource scheduling, link adaptation, massive MIMO, beam management, etc.
[0144] A collection of REs that are used for transmission of SRS is referred to as an “SRS resource,” and may be identified by the parameter “SRS-Resourceld.” The collection of resource elements can span multiple PRBs in the frequency domain and ’N’ (e.g., one or more) consecutive symbol(s) within a slot in the time domain. In a given OFDM symbol, an SRS resource occupies one or more consecutive PRBs. An “SRS resource set” is a set of SRS resources used for the transmission of SRS signals, and is identified by an SRS resource set ID (“SRS-ResourceSetld”).
[0145] The transmission of SRS resources within a given PRB has a particular comb size (also referred to as the “comb density”). A comb size ‘N’ represents the subcarrier spacing (or frequency/tone spacing) within each symbol of an SRS resource configuration. Specifically, for a comb size ‘N,‘ SRS are transmitted in every Nth subcarrier of a symbol of a PRB. For example, for comb-4, for each symbol of the SRS resource configuration. REs corresponding to every fourth subcarrier (such as subcarriers 0, 4, 8) are used to transmit SRS of the SRS resource. In the example of FIG. 4, the illustrated SRS is comb- 4 over four symbols. That is, the locations of the shaded SRS REs indicate a comb-4 SRS resource configuration.
[0146] Currently, an SRS resource may span 1, 2, 4, 8, or 12 consecutive symbols within a slot with a comb size of comb-2, comb-4, or comb-8. The following are the frequency offsets from symbol to symbol for the SRS comb patterns that are currently supported. 1 -symbol comb-2: {0}; 2-symbol comb-2: {0, 1 }; 2-symbol comb-4: {0, 2}; 4-symbol comb-2: {0, 1. 0, 1}; 4-symbol comb-4: {0, 2, 1. 3} (as in the example of FIG. 4): 8-symbol comb-4: {0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3}; 12-symbol comb-4: {0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1, 3}; 4-symbol comb-8: {0, 4, 2, 6}; 8-symbol comb-8: {0, 4, 2, 6, 1, 5, 3, 7}; and 12-symbol comb-8: {0, 4, 2, 6, 1, 5, 3, 7, 0. 4, 2, 6}.
[0147] Generally, as noted above, a UE transmits SRS to enable the receiving base station (either the serving base station or a neighboring base station) to measure the channel quality (i.e., CSI) between the UE and the base station. However, SRS can also be specifically configured as uplink positioning reference signals for uplink-based positioning
procedures, such as uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA), round-trip-time (RTT), uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA), etc. As used herein, the term "SRS " may refer to SRS configured for channel quality measurements or SRS configured for positioning purposes. The former may be referred to herein as '‘SRS-for-communication” and/or the latter may be referred to as “SRS-for-positioning” or “positioning SRS” when needed to distinguish the two types of SRS.
[0148] Several enhancements over the previous definition of SRS have been proposed for SRS- for-positioning (also referred to as “UL-PRS” or “UL-SRS”), such as a new staggered pattern within an SRS resource (except for single-symbol/comb-2), a new comb type for SRS, new sequences for SRS, a higher number of SRS resource sets per component carrier, and a higher number of SRS resources per component carrier. In addition, the parameters “SpatialRelationlnfo” and “PathLossReference” are to be configured based on a downlink reference signal or SSB from a neighboring TRP. Further still, one SRS resource may be transmitted outside the active BWP, and one SRS resource may span across multiple component carriers. Also, SRS may be configured in RRC connected state and only transmitted within an active BWP. Further, there may be no frequency hopping, no repetition factor, a single antenna port, and new lengths for SRS (e.g., 8 and 12 symbols). There also may be open-loop powder control and not closed-loop power control, and comb-8 (i.e., an SRS transmitted every eighth subcarrier in the same symbol) may be used. Lastly, the UE may transmit through the same transmit beam from multiple SRS resources for UL-AoA. All of these are features that are additional to the current SRS framework, which is configured through RRC higher layer signaling (and potentially triggered or activated through a MAC control element (MAC-CE) or downlink control information (DCI)).
[0149] NR supports a number of cellular network-based positioning technologies, including downlink-based, uplink-based, and downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods. Downlink-based positioning methods include observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) in LTE, dow nlink time difference of arrival (DL-TDOA) in NR, and dow nlink angle-of-departure (DL-AoD) in NR. FIG. 8 illustrates examples of various positioning methods, according to aspects of the disclosure. In an OTDOA or DL-TDOA positioning procedure, illustrated by scenario 810, a UE measures the differences betw een the times of arrival (ToAs) of reference signals (e.g., positioning reference signals (PRS)) received
from pairs of base stations, referred to as reference signal time difference (RSTD) or time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurements, and reports them to a positioning entity. More specifically, the UE receives the identifiers (IDs) of a reference base station (e.g.. a serving base station) and multiple non-reference base stations in assistance data. The UE then measures the RSTD between the reference base station and each of the non-reference base stations. Based on the known locations of the involved base stations and the RSTD measurements, the positioning entity (e.g.. the UE for UE-based positioning or a location server for UE-assisted positioning) can estimate the UE’s location.
[0150] For DL-AoD positioning, illustrated by scenario 820, the positioning entity uses a measurement report from the UE of received signal strength measurements of multiple downlink transmit beams to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the transmitting base station(s). The positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the transmitting base station(s).
[0151] Uplink-based positioning methods include uplink time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) and uplink angle-of-arrival (UL-AoA). UL-TDOA is similar to DL-TDOA, but is based on uplink reference signals (e.g., sounding reference signals (SRS)) transmitted by the UE to multiple base stations. Specifically, a UE transmits one or more uplink reference signals that are measured by a reference base station and a plurality of non-reference base stations. Each base station then reports the reception time (referred to as the relative time of arrival (RTOA)) of the reference signal(s) to a positioning entity (e.g., a location server) that knows the locations and relative timing of the involved base stations. Based on the reception-to-reception (Rx-Rx) time difference between the reported RTOA of the reference base station and the reported RTOA of each non-reference base station, the known locations of the base stations, and their known timing offsets, the positioning entity can estimate the location of the UE using TDOA.
[0152] For UL-AoA positioning, one or more base stations measure the received signal strength of one or more uplink reference signals (e.g., SRS) received from a UE on one or more uplink receive beams. The positioning entity uses the signal strength measurements and the angle(s) of the receive beam(s) to determine the angle(s) between the UE and the base station(s). Based on the determined angle(s) and the known location(s) of the base station(s), the positioning entity can then estimate the location of the UE.
[0153] Downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods include enhanced cell-ID (E-CID) positioning and multi-round-trip-time (RTT) positioning (also referred to as “multi-cell RTT and “multi-RTT”). In an RTT procedure, a first entity (e.g.. a base station or a UE) transmits a first RTT-related signal (e.g., a PRS or SRS) to a second entity (e.g., a UE or base station), which transmits a second RTT-related signal (e.g., an SRS or PRS) back to the first entity. Each entity measures the time difference between the time of arrival (ToA) of the received RTT-related signal and the transmission time of the transmitted RTT-related signal. This time difference is referred to as a reception-to-transmission (Rx- Tx) time difference. The Rx-Tx time difference measurement may be made, or may be adjusted, to include only a time difference between nearest slot boundaries for the received and transmitted signals. Both entities may then send their Rx-Tx time difference measurement to a location server (e.g.. an LMF 270). which calculates the round trip propagation time (i.e., RTT) between the two entities from the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements (e.g., as the sum of the two Rx-Tx time difference measurements). Alternatively, one entity may send its Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the other entity, which then calculates the RTT. The distance between the two entities can be determined from the RTT and the known signal speed (e g., the speed of light). For multi- RTT positioning, illustrated by scenario 830, a first entity' (e.g., a UE or base station) performs an RTT positioning procedure with multiple second entities (e.g., multiple base stations or UEs) to enable the location of the first entity to be determined (e.g., using multilateration) based on distances to, and the known locations of, the second entities. RTT and multi-RTT methods can be combined with other positioning techniques, such as UL-AoA and DL-AoD, to improve location accuracy, as illustrated by scenario 840.
[0154] The E-CID positioning method is based on radio resource management (RRM) measurements. In E-CID. the UE reports the serving cell ID, the timing advance (TA), and the identifiers, estimated timing, and signal strength of detected neighbor base stations. The location of the UE is then estimated based on this information and the known locations of the base station(s).
[0155] To assist positioning operations, a location server (e.g., location server 230, LMF 270. SLP 272) may provide assistance data to the UE. For example, the assistance data may include identifiers of the base stations (or the cells/TRPs of the base stations) from which to measure reference signals, the reference signal configuration parameters (e.g., the
number of consecutive slots including PRS, periodicity of the consecutive slots including PRS, muting sequence, frequency hopping sequence, reference signal identifier, reference signal bandwidth, etc.), and/or other parameters applicable to the particular positioning method. Alternatively, the assistance data may originate directly from the base stations themselves (e.g., in periodically broadcasted overhead messages, etc.). In some cases, the UE may be able to detect neighbor network nodes itself without the use of assistance data. [0156] In the case of an OTDOA or DL-TDOA positioning procedure, the assistance data may further include an expected RSTD value and an associated uncertainty, or search window, around the expected RSTD. In some cases, the value range of the expected RSTD may be +/- 500 microseconds (ps). In some cases, when any of the resources used for the positioning measurement are in FR1, the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 32 ps. In other cases, when all of the resources used for the positioning measurement(s) are in FR2, the value range for the uncertainty of the expected RSTD may be +/- 8 ps.
[0157] A location estimate may be referred to by other names, such as a position estimate, location, position, position fix, fix, or the like. A location estimate may be geodetic and comprise coordinates (e g., latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude) or may be civic and comprise a street address, postal address, or some other verbal description of a location. A location estimate may further be defined relative to some other known location or defined in absolute terms (e.g., using latitude, longitude, and possibly altitude). A location estimate may include an expected error or uncertainty (e.g., by including an area or volume within which the location is expected to be included with some specified or default level of confidence).
[0158] In NR, there may not be precise timing synchronization across the network. Instead, it may be sufficient to have coarse time-synchronization across base stations (e.g., within a cyclic prefix (CP) duration of the orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols). RTT-based methods generally only need coarse timing synchronization, and as such, are a preferred positioning method in NR.
[0159] FIG. 9 illustrates an example wireless communications system 900. according to aspects of the disclosure. In the example of FIG. 9, a UE 904 (e.g., any of the UEs described herein) is attempting to calculate an estimate of its location, or assist another entity (e.g., a base station or core network component, another UE, a location server, a third party
application, etc.) to calculate an estimate of its location. The UE 904 may transmit and receive wireless signals to and from a plurality of network nodes (labeled "‘Node”) 902- 1. 902-2. and 902-3 (collectively, network nodes 902). The network nodes 902 may include one or more base stations (e.g., any of the base stations described herein), one or more reconfigurable intelligent displays (RIS), one or more positioning beacons, one or more UEs (e.g., connected over sidelinks), etc.
[0160] In a network-centric RTT positioning procedure the serving base station (e.g.. one of network nodes 902) instructs the UE 904 to measure RTT measurement signals (e.g., PRS) from two or more neighboring network nodes 902 (and typically the serving base station, as at least three network nodes 902 are needed for a two-dimensional location estimate). The involved network nodes 902 transmit RTT measurement signals on low reuse resources (e.g.. resources used by the network nodes 902 to transmit system information, where the network nodes 902 are base stations) allocated by the network (e.g., location server 230, LMF 270, SLP 272). The UE 904 records the arrival time (also referred to as the receive time, reception time, time of reception, or time of arrival) of each RTT measurement signal relative to the UE’s 904 current downlink timing (e.g., as derived by the UE 904 from a downlink signal received from its serving base station), and transmits a common or individual RTT response signal (e.g., SRS) to the involved network nodes 902 on resources allocated by its serving base station. The UE 904, if it not the positioning entity, reports a UE reception-to-transmission (Rx-Tx) time difference measurement to the positioning entity. The UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement indicates the time difference between the arrival time of each RTT measurement signal at the UE 904 and the transmission time(s) of the RTT response signal(s). Each involved network node 902 also reports, to the positioning entity, a network node Rx-Tx time difference measurement (also referred to as a base station (BS) or gNB Rx-Tx time difference measurement), which indicates the difference between the transmission time of the RTT measurement signal and the reception time of the RTT response signal.
[0161] A UE-centric RTT positioning procedure is similar to the network-based procedure, except that the UE 904 transmits uplink RTT measurement signal(s) (e.g.. on resources allocated by the serving base station). The uplink RTT measurement signal(s) are measured by multiple network nodes 902 in the neighborhood of the UE 904. Each involved network node 902 responds with a downlink RTT response signal and reports a
network node Rx-Tx time difference measurement to the positioning entity. The network node Rx-Tx time difference measurement indicates the time difference between the arrival time of the RTT measurement signal at the network node 902 and the transmission time of the RTT response signal. The UE 904, if it is not the positioning entity, reports, for each network node 902, a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement that indicates the difference between the transmission time of the RTT measurement signal and the reception time of the RTT response signal.
[0162] In order to determine the location (x, y) of the UE 904, the positioning entity’ needs to know the locations of the network nodes 902, which may be represented in a reference coordinate system as (x_k, y_y), where k=l, 2, 3 in the example of FIG. 9. Where the UE 904 is the positioning entity, a location server with knowledge of the network geometry (e.g.. location server 230, LMF 270. SLP 272) may provide the locations of the involved network nodes 902 to the UE 904.
[0163] The positioning entity determines each distance 910 (d_k, where k=l, 2, 3) between the UE 904 and the respective network node 902 based on the UE Rx-Tx and network node Rx-Tx time difference measurements and the speed of light, as described further below with reference to FIG. 10. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 9, the distance 910-1 between the UE 904 and the network node 902-1 is d_l, the distance 910-2 between the UE 904 and the netw ork node 902-2 is d_2, and the distance 910-3 between the UE 904 and the network node 902-3 is d_3. Once each distance 910 is determined, the positioning entity can solve for the location (x, y) of the UE 904 by using a variety' of known geometric techniques, such as trilateration. From FIG. 9, it can be seen that the location of the UE 904 ideally lies at the common intersection of three semicircles, each semicircle being defined by radius dk and center (x_k, y_k), where k=l, 2. 3.
[0164] FIG. 10 is a diagram 1000 showing example timings of RTT measurement signals exchanged between a netw ork node 1002 (labeled “Node”) and a UE 1004, according to aspects of the disclosure. The UE 1004 may be any of the UEs described herein. The network node 1002 may be a base station (e.g., any of the base stations described herein), an RIS. a positioning beacon, another UE (e.g., connected over a sidelink), or the like.
[0165] In the example of FIG. 10, the network node 1002 (labeled “BS”) sends an RTT measurement signal 1010 (e.g., PRS) to the UE 1004 at time T_l. The RTT measurement signal 1010 has some propagation delay T_Prop as it travels from the netw ork node 1002
to the UE 1004. At time T_2 (the reception time of the RTT measurement signal 1010 at the UE 1004), the UE 1004 measures the RTT measurement signal 1010. After some UE processing time, the UE 1004 transmits an RTT response signal 1020 (e.g.. SRS) at time T_3. After the propagation delay T Prop, the network node 1002 measures the RTT response signal 1020 from the UE 1004 at time T_4 (the reception time of the RTT response signal 1020 at the network node 1002).
[0166] The UE 1004 reports the difference between time T 3 and time T 2 (i.e., the UE’s 1004 Rx-Tx time difference measurement, shown as UE_Rx-Tx 1012) to the positioning entity. Similarly, the network node 1002 reports the difference betw een time T_4 and time T_1 (i.e., the network node’s 1002 Rx-Tx time difference measurement, shown as Node_Rx- Tx 1022) to the positioning entity. Using these measurements and the known speed of light, the positioning entity can calculate the distance to the UE 1004 as d = l/2*c*(Node_Rx-Tx - UE_Rx-Tx) = l/2*c*(T_4 - T_l) - l/2*c*(T_3 - T_2), where c is the speed of light.
[0167] Based on the known location of the netw ork node 1002 and the distance betw een the UE 1004 and the network node 1002 (and at least two other network nodes 1002), the positioning entity can calculate the location of the UE 1004. As shown in FIG. 9, the location of the UE 1004 lies at the common intersection of three semicircles, each semicircle being defined by a radius of the distance between the UE 1004 and a respective network node 1002.
[0168] In an aspect, the positioning entity may calculate the UE’s 904/1004 location using atwo- dimensional coordinate system; however, the aspects disclosed herein are not so limited, and may also be applicable to determining locations using a three-dimensional coordinate system, if the extra dimension is desired. Additionally, while FIG. 9 illustrates one UE 904 and three network nodes 902 and FIG. 10 illustrates one UE 1004 and one netw ork node 1002, as will be appreciated, there may be more UEs 904/1004 and more netw ork nodes 902/1002.
[0169] Support is contemplated in some communications systems (e.g., Rel-18 NR NTN WI) to support a single-sat multi-RTT technique for network verified UE location in. For example, in some designs, multi-RTT may be used to support the network verified UE location in NTN assuming a single satellite in view-. Although multi-RTT technique for
positioning in terrestrial networks is already supported by 3 GPP, enhancements are needed to take account of the fast movement of satellites, e.g.:
• Slot durations of the received DL signal are not time varying at UE.
• UE has to constantly perform autonomous transmit timing adjustment.
[0170] FIG. 11 illustrates a single-sat multi-RTT technique 1100, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure. In FIG. 11, a fast-moving low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite 1102 is depicted at locations denoted as (1). (2), (3) and (4). At location (1). the LEO satellite 1102 transmits a DL-PRS for RTT to UE 1104, denoted as RTT1. At location (2), the LEO satellite 1102 receives a UL-PRS for RTT from UE 1104, denoted as RTT2. At location (3), the LEO satellite 1102 transmits a DL-PRS for RTT to UE 1104, denoted as RTT3. At location (4), the LEO satellite 1102 receives a UL-PRS for RTT from UE 1104, denoted as RTT4. In this scenario, the fast-moving nature of the LEO satellite 1 102 provides sufficient spatial diversity for position estimation and/or position verification of the UE 1104 (which even if moving, is moving at much less speed than the LEO satellite 1104 and in comparison may be considered “stationary'’).
[0171] FIG. 12 illustrates terrestrial network (TN) timing 1200. in accordance with aspects of the disclosure. In FIG. 12, a gNB DL timing reference, a gNB UL timing reference, a UE DL timing reference, and a UE UL timing reference are depicted with respect to a subframe.
[0172] Referring to FIG. TN, RTT =TuE-RX-rx+TgNB_RX-TX. UE reports TUE-RX-TX with time stamp being the slot number of a DL PRS, m. The gNB reports T8NB RX-TX with time stamp being the slot number of a SRS, n. LMF can match the two as long as m and n are not too far away. For this reason, UE and gNB reports are decoupled, i.e., UE have the freedom to choose the subframes (SF) for which TUE-RX-TX are reported and gNB have the freedom to choose the received SRS for which TgNB RX-TX are reported. For this reason, Note that TUE-RX-TX and TgNB RX-TX do not need to be for the same TN subframe. Assumptions for the above equation (RTT =TUE-RX-TX+T8NB RX-TX) are that there is no UE timing advance (TA) change between the measurement time of UE RX-TX time difference, m, and the time of SRS transmission.!!, that the same TA is applied to all slots in subframe (SF), and SF duration is constant at UE.
[0173] FIG. 13 illustrates a UE timing scenario 1300 for TUE-RX-TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure. In FIG. 13, a UE DL subframe i significantly lags a UE UL subframe i,
which may have a higher tendency to occur in NTN positioning. Various problems may occur if TN timing techniques for RTT are migrated to NTN positioning.
[0174] For current definition of UE Rx-Tx Time Difference (TUE-RX-TX):
• In TN, if j and i are equal (i.e., RTT is less than 0.5 ms and NTA-offset=0), UE Rx- Tx time difference is the TA.
• In NTN, UE Rx-Tx time difference is
TUE RX-TX = TA (of subframe j)-(j-i) subframe durations at UE
[0175] More specifically, in some designs:
Table 1
[0176] In terms of subframe start, for NTN, it may be difficult to estimate the start of a subframe. Determining the subframe start using multiple DL-PRS may be difficult. Also, when multiple DL-PRS are used, ephemeris and GNSS may also need to be used. Therefore, the benefit of such techniques in NTN positioning is questionable.
[0177] In terms of transmit timing, subframe j is unknown in NTN to the Network in general unless accurate TA is reported.
[0178] In terms of the use of subframes in general, the maximum RTT change in 1 ms may be 90 ns. UEs may thereby have different TAs for slots in SF.
[0179] FIG. 14 illustrates a gNB timing scenario 1400 for TUE-R -TX, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure. Various problems may occur if TN timing techniques for RTT are migrated to NTN positioning.
[0180] For current definition of gNB Rx-Tx Time Difference (TgNB-RX-Tx), when NTA _offset=0, it is the UE UL timing error of subframe i for both TN and NTN, as depicted in FIG. 14.
[0181] More specifically, in some designs:
Table 2
[0182] As will be appreciated, for gNB scenario, some of the same problems may occur if TN timing techniques for RTT are migrated to NTN positioning as compared to the UE side.
[0183] Aspects of the disclosure are directed to Rx-Tx time differences between a UE and NTN entity (e.g., LEO satellite) in various scenarios. Such aspects may provide various technical advantages, such as overcoming some or all of the problems that may arise if TN timing techniques for Rx-Tx time differences are mirrored for NTN positioning (e.g., more accurate subframe start time, a ‘coupled’ Rx-Tx time difference reporting by both the UE and NTN entity, and so on), which may in turn improve position estimation accuracy of the UE and/or position verification accuracy of the UE.
[0184] FIG. 15 illustrates an exemplary process 1500 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure. The process 1500 of FIG. 15 is performed by a UE, such as UE 302.
[0185] Referring to FIG. 15, at 1510, UE 302 (e.g., receiver 312 or 322 or 330, etc.) receives a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial net ork (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period. A means for performing the reception of 1510 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 330, etc., of FIG. 3A.
[0186] Referring to FIG. 15, at 1520, UE 302 (e.g., transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc.) transmits an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period. A means for performing the transmission of 1520 may include transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc., of FIG. 3 A.
[0187] Referring to FIG. 15, at 1530, UE 302 (e.g., transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc.) transmits a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp. In some designs, the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period. For example, information “sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)-(iii), e g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii). A means for performing the transmission of 1530 may include transmitter 314 or 324 or 330-2, etc., of FIG. 3A.
[0188] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, the downlink timing period is a downlink slot, a downlink subframe, or a dow nlink symbol, and the uplink timing period is an uplink slot, an uplink subframe, or an uplink symbol. In some designs, a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both. For example, if the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on. In case of symbol-level time stamps, indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DL-RS (e.g., DL-PRS, etc.) in addition to slot/SFN indices may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
[0189] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, a DL-PRS instance associated w ith the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration
for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE. In some designs, the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
[0190] Referring to FIG. 15. in some designs, the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0191] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
[0192] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0193] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, the UE further transmits a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates the type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity (e.g., LMF), and receives a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN (e g., from position estimation entity such as LMF). For example, the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication may indicate the exact UE Rx-Tx time difference definition and associated reports that the UE is capable of measuring/reporting For instance, if a legacy Rx-Tx time difference is measured, UE may further add Doppler information (e.g., so that the position estimation entity can apply a Doppler-based adjustment to the legacy Rx-Tx time difference). Alternatively, if the UE can support one or more of the ‘new’ Rx-Tx time differences described above, the UE is
capable of measuring/reporting a new Rx-Tx time difference without expressly indicating the Doppler to the position estimation entity.
[0194] Referring to FIG. 15, in some designs, the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information (e.g., if the UE is not instructed to use a particular measurement report configuration, a measurement report configuration selected/used by the UE may instead be indicated in the measurement report).
[0195] FIG. 16 illustrates an exemplary process 1600 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure. The process 1600 of FIG. 16 is performed by aNTN entity, such as BS 304, NTN entity 1102, etc.
[0196] Referring to FIG. 16, at 1610. the NTN entity (e.g., receiver 352 or 362 or 370-1, etc.) receives an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period. A means for performing the reception of 1610 may include receiver 352 or 362 or 370-1, etc., of FIG. 3B.
[0197] Referring to FIG. 16. at 1620, the NTN entity (e.g., transmitter 354 or 364 or 370-2, etc.) transmits a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp. In some designs, the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period. For example, information “sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least tw o of (i)-(iii), e.g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii). A means for performing the transmission of 1620 may include transmitter 354 or 364 or 370-2, etc., of FIG. 3B.
[0198] Referring to FIG. 16, in some designs, the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period. In some designs, the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index. In some designs, the DL-RS is a DL
positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI- RS) (e.g., or any other type of DL-RS).
[0199] Referring to FIG. 16. in some designs, the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0200] Referring to FIG. 16, in some designs, the downlink timing period is a downlink slot, a downlink subframe, or a do nlink symbol, and the uplink timing period is an uplink slot, an uplink subframe, or an uplink symbol. In some designs, a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both. For example, if the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on. In case of symbol-level time stamps, indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DL-RS (e.g., DL-PRS, etc.) in addition to slot/SFN indices may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
[0201] Referring to FIG. 16. in some designs, a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE. In some designs, the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless netw ork component, or the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
[0202] Referring to FIG. 16, in some designs, the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0203] Referring to FIG. 16, in some designs, the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the NTN entity Rx- Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.,.
[0204] FIG. 17 illustrates an exemplary process 1700 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure. The process 1700 of FIG. 17 is performed by a position estimation entity. In some designs, the position estimation entity may correspond to a network component (e.g., an LMF integrated at gNB/BS 304/NTN entity or 0-RAN component
or a remote location server such as network entity 306, etc ). In other designs, the position estimation entity may correspond to another UE (e.g., sidelink anchor UE) or to the target UE itself (e.g.. for UE-based position estimation, in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the UE and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the UE over a data bus, etc.) or to the NTN entity itself (e.g., in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the NTN entity and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the NTN entity over a data bus, etc.). In a further aspect, the process 1700 of FIG. 17 at the position estimation entity may correspond to a process performed in parallel with the process 1500 of FIG. 15 at the UE.
[0205] Referring to FIG. 17, at 1710, the position estimation entity (e.g.. receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or netowrk transceiver(s) 380 or 390, etc.) receives a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp. For example, information ■’sufficient" to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)- (iii), e.g., (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii). A means for performing the reception of 1710 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or network transceiver(s) 380 or 390, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
[0206] Referring to FIG. 17. at 1720, the position estimation entity (e.g., processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx-Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc.) determines a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information. A means for performing the determination of 1720 may include processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx- Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C. depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
[0207] Referring to FIG. 17, in some designs, the position estimation entity may further determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration
for a position estimation session of the UE, and may transmit an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively. In this manner, particular UL-SRS instances.
[0208] Referring to FIG. 17, in some designs, the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe, and the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe. In some designs, a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both. For example, if the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on. In case of symbol-level time stamps, indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DLRS (e.g., DL-PRS, etc.) in addition to slot/SFN indices may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
[0209] Referring to FIG. 17, in some designs, the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
[0210] Referring to FIG. 17, in some designs, the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0211] FIG. 18 illustrates an exemplary process 1800 of communications according to an aspect of the disclosure. The process 1800 of FIG. 18 is performed by a position estimation entity. In some designs, the position estimation entity may correspond to a network component (e g., an LMF integrated at gNB/BS 304/NTN entity or 0-RAN component or a remote location server such as network entity 306, etc.). In other designs, the position estimation entity may correspond to another UE (e.g., sidelink anchor UE) or to the target UE itself (e.g.. for UE-based position estimation, in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the UE and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information betw een different logical components of the UE over a data bus, etc.) or to the NTN entity itself (e.g., in which case any Rx/Tx operations between the NTN entity
and the position estimation entity may correspond to transfer of information between different logical components of the NTN entity over a data bus. etc ). In a further aspect, the process 1800 of FIG. 18 at the position estimation entity may correspond to a process performed in parallel with the process 1600 of FIG. 16 at the NTN entity.
[0212] Referring to FIG. 18, at 1810, the position estimation entity' (e.g., receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or network transceiver(s) 380 or 390, etc.) receives a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp. For example, information ‘"sufficient” to determine (i)-(iii) may include at least two of (i)-(iii), e.g.. (i)+(ii) or (i)+(iii) or (ii)+(iii) or (i)+(ii)+(iii). A means for performing the reception of 1810 may include receiver 312 or 322 or 352 or 362 or 330-1 or 370-1 or data bus 334 or data bus 382 or network transceivers) 380 or 390, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
[0213] Referring to FIG. 18, at 1820, the position estimation entity (e g., processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx-Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc.) determines a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity' based at least in part on the information. A means for performing the determination of 1820 may include processor(s) 332 or 384 or 394, Rx-Tx component 342 or 388 or 398, etc., of FIGS. 3A-3C, depending upon the implementation of the position estimation entity as noted above.
[0214] Referring to FIG. 18, in some designs, the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS), or the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0215] Referring to FIG. 18, in some designs, the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0216] Referring to FIG. 18. in some designs, the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0217] Referring to FIG. 18, in some designs, the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe, and the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe.
In some designs, a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both. For example, if the downlink timing period is a slot then the first time stamp may be a slot indication, if the uplink timing period is a subframe then the second time stamp may be a subframe indication, and so on. In case of symbol-level time stamps, indices of the starting symbols UL-SRS and/or DLRS (e.g., DL-PRS. etc.) in addition to slot/SFN indices may be reported to the LMF. In some designs, this information can be included in the time stamp or separately reported to the LMF.
[0218] FIG. 19 illustrates an example implementation 1900 of the processes 1500-1800 of FIGS. 15-18, respectively, in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
[0219] Referring to FIG. 19, in a specific example specific to UE Rx-Tx time difference, a new type (type-2) of UE- Rx-Tx time difference may be defined. A Type-2 UE Rx-Tx time difference in NTN is the time gap between the received timing of subframe(slot) i of a transmission point (TP) and the transmit timing of a UL subframe(slot) j of the TP, depicted in FIG. 19 as Tl. By definition or by specification the subframe/slot j containing a SRS. By definition or by specification, subframe/slot i must contain a PRS that is closet to subframe/slot j in time at UE. The received timing is determined by the DL PRS that starts within the subframe. When determining the start timing of a subframe/slot, nominal symbol duration (e.g., assuming zero Doppler shift) is assumed for symbols before the start of PRS/SRS in the subframe/slot. The nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211. UE reports the transmit SF/slot index j and SF/slot index i or the SF/slot index j and the difference between SF/slot index i and j, or the SF/slot index i and the difference between i and j. LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. Alternatively, UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
[0220] Referring to FIG. 19, in another specific example specific to UE Rx-Tx time difference, a new type (Type-2) UE Rx-Tx time difference is defined. The UE Rx-Tx time difference is the time difference of received timing of subframe/slot i of a TP and the transmit timing
of subframe/slot i of the TP (i.e., TA of SF/slot i). The received timing of a subframe/slot may be determined by one or multiple PRS from the TP. UE reports the time stamp, the subframe/slot index of the SRS. together with UE Rx-Tx time difference. LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. Alternatively, UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx- Tx to be measured and reported. When determining the start timing of a subframe/slot, nominal symbol duration is assumed for symbols before the start of PRS/SRS in the subframe/slot. The nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
[0221] Referring to FIG. 19, in another specific example specific to UE Rx-Tx time difference, legacy UE- Rx-Tx time difference (as used in TN positioning) with enhancements may be utilized. UE reports the transmit SF/slot index j and SF/slot index i or the SF/slot index j and the difference between SF/slot index i and j, or the SF/slot index i and the difference between i and j. UE reports the Doppler of the DL signal together with each UE Rx-Tx time difference LMF or gNB configures a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. Alternatively, UE indicates to gNB beforehand a minimal set of SRS for which UE Rx-Tx to be measured and reported. When determining the start timing of a subframe/slot. nominal symbol duration is assumed for symbols before the start of PRS/SRS in the subframe/slot. The nominal symbol duration is the duration of a symbol at gNB as defined by 38.211. While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
[0222] Referring to FIG. 19, in another specific example specific to UE Rx-Tx time difference, both a new type (Type-2) UE Rx-Tx time difference and legacy UE Rx-Tx time difference can be supported. In this case, either UE or LMF indicates which t pe to be reported (e.g., based on UE capability, etc.). While described above with respect to UE Rx-Tx time difference, it will be appreciated that a similar procedure may be implemented at the NTN entity to derive the NTN Rx-Tx time difference.
[0223] In the detailed description above it can be seen that different features are grouped together in examples. This manner of disclosure should not be understood as an intention that the
example clauses have more features than are explicitly mentioned in each clause. Rather, the various aspects of the disclosure may include fewer than all features of an individual example clause disclosed. Therefore, the following clauses should hereby be deemed to be incorporated in the description, wherein each clause by itself can stand as a separate example. Although each dependent clause can refer in the clauses to a specific combination with one of the other clauses, the aspect(s) of that dependent clause are not limited to the specific combination. It will be appreciated that other example clauses can also include a combination of the dependent clause aspect(s) with the subject matter of any other dependent clause or independent clause or a combination of any feature with other dependent and independent clauses. The various aspects disclosed herein expressly include these combinations, unless it is explicitly expressed or can be readily inferred that a specific combination is not intended (e.g., contradictory aspects, such as defining an element as both an electrical insulator and an electrical conductor). Furthermore, it is also intended that aspects of a clause can be included in any other independent clause, even if the clause is not directly dependent on the independent clause.
[0224] Implementation examples are described in the following numbered clauses:
[0225] Clause 1. A method of operating a user equipment (UE), comprising: receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0226] Clause 2. The method of clause 1, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0227] Clause 3. The method of clause 2, wherein a time stamp granularity7 associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
[0228] Clause 4. The method of any of clauses 1 to 3, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL- SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
[0229] Clause 5. The method of clause 4, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
[0230] Clause 6. The method of any of clauses 1 to 5, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0231] Clause 7. The method of any of clauses 1 to 6, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
[0232] Clause 8. The method of any of clauses 1 to 7, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0233] Clause 9. The method of any of clauses 1 to 8. further comprising: transmitting a UE Rx- Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position
estimation entity; and receiving a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
[0234] Clause 10. The method of any of clauses 1 to 9. wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
[0235] Clause 11. A method of operating a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, comprising: receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0236] Clause 12. The method of clause 11, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0237] Clause 13. The method of clause 12, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0238] Clause 14. The method of any of clauses 12 to 13, wherein the DL-RS is aDL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI-RS).
[0239] Clause 15. The method of any of clauses 11 to 14, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0240] Clause 16. The method of any of clauses 11 to 15, wherein the dow nlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0241] Clause 17. The method of any of clauses 1 1 to 16, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
[0242] Clause 18. The method of clause 17, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
[0243] Clause 19. The method of any of clauses 11 to 18, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0244] Clause 20. The method of any of clauses 11 to 19, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity7 Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
[0245] Clause 21. A method of operating a position estimation entity, comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0246] Clause 22. The method of clause 21, further comprising: determining a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmitting an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
[0247] Clause 23. The method of any of clauses 21 to 22, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0248] Clause 24. The method of any of clauses 21 to 23, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information
comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
[0249] Clause 25. The method of any of clauses 21 to 24, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0250] Clause 26. A method of operating a position estimation entity, comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0251] Clause 27. The method of clause 26, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0252] Clause 28. The method of clause 27, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0253] Clause 29. The method of any of clauses 26 to 28, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0254] Clause 30. The method of any of clauses 26 to 29, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0255] Clause 31. A user equipment (UE), comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory' and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmit, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver,
a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0256] Clause 32. The UE of clause 31, wherein the dow nlink timing period is a dow nlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0257] Clause 33. The UE of clause 32, wherein a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
[0258] Clause 34. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 33, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
[0259] Clause 35. The UE of clause 34, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
[0260] Clause 36. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 35, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0261] Clause 37. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 36, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the
information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
[0262] Clause 38. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 37. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0263] Clause 39. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 38, wherein the at least one processor is further configured to: transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
[0264] Clause 40. The UE of any of clauses 31 to 39, wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
[0265] Clause 41. A non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0266] Clause 42. The NTN entity of clause 41, wherein the dow nlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0267] Clause 43. The NTN entity of clause 42, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DLRS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0268] Clause 44. The NTN entity of any of clauses 42 to 43, wherein the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI- RS).
[0269] Clause 45. The NTN of any of clauses 41 to 44, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0270] Clause 46. The NTN entity of any of clauses 41 to 45, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0271] Clause 47. The NTN entity7 of any of clauses 41 to 46, w erein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
[0272] Clause 48. The NTN entity of clause 47, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
[0273] Clause 49. The NTN entity' of any of clauses 41 to 48, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0274] Clause 50. The NTN entity of any of clauses 41 to 49, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
[0275] Clause 51. A position estimation entity, comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a dow nlink timing period associated w ith receipt of a dow nlink
positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0276] Clause 52. The position estimation entity' of clause 51, wherein the at least one processor is further configured to: determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmit, via the at least one transceiver, an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
[0277] Clause 53. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 51 to 52, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0278] Clause 54. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 51 to 53. wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
[0279] Clause 55. The position estimation entity' of any of clauses 51 to 54, w herein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0280] Clause 56. A position estimation entity, comprising: a memory; at least one transceiver; and at least one processor communicatively^ coupled to the memory and the at least one transceiver, the at least one processor configured to: receive, via the at least one transceiver, a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time
stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0281] Clause 57. The position estimation entity of clause 56. wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0282] Clause 58. The position estimation entity of clause 57. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0283] Clause 59. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 56 to 58, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0284] Clause 60. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 56 to 59, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0285] Clause 61. A user equipment (UE), comprising: means for receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; means for transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity’ at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference betw een a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0286] Clause 62. The UE of clause 61, wherein the do nlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0287] Clause 63. The UE of clause 62, wherein a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
[0288] Clause 64. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 63, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
[0289] Clause 65. The UE of clause 64, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
[0290] Clause 66. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 65, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0291] Clause 67. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 66, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
[0292] Clause 68. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 67. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0293] Clause 69. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 68, further comprising: means for transmitting a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and means for receiving a measurement report configuration
for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
[0294] Clause 70. The UE of any of clauses 61 to 69, wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
[0295] Clause 71. A non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, comprising: means for receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and means for transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
[0296] Clause 72. The NTN entity of clause 71, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0297] Clause 73. The NTN entity of clause 72, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated ith the DLRS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0298] Clause 74. The NTN entity of any of clauses 72 to 73, wherein the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI- RS).
[0299] Clause 75. The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 74, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0300] Clause 76. The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 75, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0301] Clause 77. The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 76, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
[0302] Clause 78. The NTN entity of clause 77, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
[0303] Clause 79. The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 78, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0304] Clause 80. The NTN entity of any of clauses 71 to 79, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
[0305] Clause 81. A position estimation entity, comprising: means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receivetransmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0306] Clause 82. The position estimation entity of clause 81, further comprising: means for determining a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and means for transmitting an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
[0307] Clause 83. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 82, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and
wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0308] Clause 84. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 83. wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
[0309] Clause 85. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 81 to 84, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0310] Clause 86. A position estimation entity, comprising: means for receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (hi) the second time stamp; and means for determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0311] Clause 87. The position estimation entity of clause 86, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0312] Clause 88. The position estimation entity of clause 87, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0313] Clause 89. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 86 to 88, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0314] Clause 90. The position estimation entity of any of clauses 86 to 89, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0315] Clause 91. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a user equipment (UE), cause the UE to: receive a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a dow link timing period; transmit an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
[0316] Clause 92. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 91, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0317] Clause 93. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 92, wherein a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
[0318] Clause 94. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 93, wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL-PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE. and/or wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
[0319] Clause 95. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 94, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
[0320] Clause 96. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 95, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0321] Clause 97. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 96, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx- Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
[0322] Clause 98. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 97, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0323] Clause 99. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 98. further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the UE, cause the UE to: transmit a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receive a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication for NTN.
[0324] Clause 100. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 91 to 99, wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
[0325] Clause 101. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity7, cause the NTN entity to: receive an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment (UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmit a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity' receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing
period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period. [0326] Clause 102. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 101, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0327] Clause 103. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 102, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0328] Clause 104. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 102 to 103. wherein the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSLRS).
[0329] Clause 105. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 104, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0330] Clause 106. The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 105, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0331] Clause 107. The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 106, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
[0332] Clause 108. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 107, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
[0333] Clause 109. The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 108, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration
for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
[0334] Clause 110. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 101 to 109. wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
[0335] Clause 111. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity', cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity' and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL- SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0336] Clause 112. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 111, further comprising computer-executable instructions that, when executed by the position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: determine a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmit an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL- SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
[0337] Clause 113. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 112, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0338] Clause 114. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 113, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time
stamp, or wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
[0339] Clause 115. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of any of clauses 111 to 114, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
[0340] Clause 116. A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer-executable instructions that, when executed by a position estimation entity, cause the position estimation entity to: receive a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determine a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
[0341] Clause 117. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 116, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
[0342] Clause 118. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of clause 117, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
[0343] Clause 119. The non-transitor ' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 116 to 118, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
[0344] Clause 120. The non-transitory' computer-readable medium of any of clauses 116 to 119, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
[0345] Those of skill in the art will appreciate that information and signals may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be
referenced throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
[0346] Further, those of skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithm steps described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be implemented as electronic hardware, computer software, or combinations of both. To clearly illustrate this interchangeability of hardware and software, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described above generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality' is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality in varying ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the present disclosure.
[0347] The various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be implemented or performed with a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an ASIC, a field-programable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, for example, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration.
[0348] The methods, sequences and/or algorithms described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein may be embodied directly in hardware, in a software module executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two. A software module may reside in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An example storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the
processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium may be integral to the processor. The processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC. The ASIC may reside in a user terminal (e.g.. UE). In the alternative, the processor and the storage medium may reside as discrete components in a user terminal.
[0349] In one or more example aspects, the functions described may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium. Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another. A storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a computer. By way of example, and not limitation, such computer-readable media can comprise RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave, then the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair. DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of medium. Disk and disc, as used herein, includes compact disc (CD), laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD), floppy disk and Blu-ray disc where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs reproduce data optically with lasers. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
[0350] While the foregoing disclosure show s illustrative aspects of the disclosure, it should be noted that various changes and modifications could be made herein without departing from the scope of the disclosure as defined by the appended claims. The functions, steps and/or actions of the method claims in accordance with the aspects of the disclosure described herein need not be performed in any particular order. Furthermore, although
elements of the disclosure may be described or claimed in the singular, the plural is contemplated unless limitation to the singular is explicitly stated.
Claims
1. A method of operating a user equipment (UE), comprising: receiving a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity in a first symbol of a downlink timing period; transmitting an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity at a second symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a UE receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the downlink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
3. The method of claim 2. wherein a time stamp granularity associated with the first time stamp, the second time stamp, or both, corresponds to a respective granularity associated with the downlink timing period, the uplink timing period, or both.
4. The method of claim 1 , wherein a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS is among a subset of DL- PRS instances associated with a DL-PRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE, and/or
wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL- SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for the position estimation session of the UE.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of DL-PRS instances and/or the subset of UL-SRS instances are indicated or requested by the UE.
6. The method of claim 1. wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
7. The method of claim 1 , wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS and the second time stamp.
8. The method of claim 1. wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
9. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
transmitting a UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability indication that indicates a type of UE Rx-Tx time difference the UE is capable of measuring and/or reporting for NTN to a position estimation entity; and receiving a measurement report configuration for the information in response to the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement capability' indication for NTN.
10. The method of claim 1 , wherein the measurement report further comprises an indication of a measurement report configuration associated with the information.
11. A method of operating a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity, comprising: receiving an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) from a user equipment
(UE) at a first symbol of an uplink timing period; and transmitting a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of the uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp, wherein the start of the downlink timing period is based on one or more assumptions associated with symbol duration for one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the uplink timing period.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
14. The method of claim 12, wherein the DL-RS is a DL positioning reference signal (DL-PRS) or a DL channel state information RS (DL-CSI-RS).
15. The method of claim 1 1, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
16. The method of claim 11, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
17. The method of claim 11, wherein a UL-SRS instance associated with the UL-SRS is among a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with a UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is configured by a location management function (LMF) or a wireless network component, or wherein the subset of UL-SRS instances is indicated or requested by the UE.
19. The method of claim 11, wherein the one or more assumptions comprise an assumption that the symbol duration for the one or more symbols preceding the first symbol of the downlink timing period corresponds to a predefined symbol duration based on a zero Doppler condition.
20. The method of claim 11, wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the NTN entity Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or
wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp.
21. A method of operating a position estimation entity, comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a user equipment (UE) receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period associated with receipt of a downlink positioning reference symbol (DL-PRS) from a non-terrestrial network (NTN) entity and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period associated with transmission of an uplink sounding reference signal (UL-SRS) to the NTN entity, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between the UE and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
22. The method of claim 21, further comprising: determining a subset of UL-SRS instances associated with UL-SRS resource configuration for a position estimation session of the UE; and transmitting an indication of the subset of UL-SRS instances to the UE and the NTN entity to facilitate transmission and measurement of one or more UL-SRSs on the UL-SRS instances by the UE and the NTN entity, respectively.
23. The method of claim 21, wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uplink timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
24. The method of claim 21, wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the first time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and the second time stamp, or
wherein the information comprises the first time stamp and the second time stamp, or wherein the information comprises the UE Rx-Tx time difference and Doppler information associated with the DL-PRS.
25. The method of claim 21, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-PRS instance associated with the DL-PRS.
26. A method of operating a position estimation entity, comprising: receiving a measurement report comprising information sufficient to determine (i) a NTN entity receive-transmit (Rx-Tx) time difference between a first time stamp corresponding to a start of an uplink timing period and a second time stamp corresponding to a start of a downlink timing period, (ii) the first time stamp, and (iii) the second time stamp; and determining a round-trip time (RTT) between a user equipment (UE) and the NTN entity based at least in part on the information.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the downlink timing period comprises a downlink positioning reference signal (DL-RS), or wherein the downlink timing period is associated with a same system subframe number and/or a same slot index as the uplink timing period.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein the UL-SRS is associated with an earliest UL-SRS instance that is subsequent to a DL-RS instance associated with the DL-RS or within the same system subframe number and/or the same slot index.
29. The method of claim 26, wherein the start of the uplink timing period is determined based on a receive timing of the UL-SRS that starts within the uplink timing period.
30. The method of claim 26,
wherein the downlink timing period is a downlink slot or a downlink subframe or a downlink symbol, and wherein the uphnk timing period is an uplink slot or an uplink subframe or an uplink symbol.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| GR20230100283 | 2023-04-04 | ||
| PCT/US2024/012915 WO2024210975A1 (en) | 2023-04-04 | 2024-01-25 | Receive-transmit time difference for round-trip time associated with non-terrestrial network entity |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| EP4690544A1 true EP4690544A1 (en) | 2026-02-11 |
Family
ID=89983826
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| EP24706349.8A Pending EP4690544A1 (en) | 2023-04-04 | 2024-01-25 | Receive-transmit time difference for round-trip time associated with non-terrestrial network entity |
Country Status (4)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP4690544A1 (en) |
| KR (1) | KR20250165330A (en) |
| CN (1) | CN120937274A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2024210975A1 (en) |
Family Cites Families (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2023015073A1 (en) * | 2021-08-03 | 2023-02-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Signaling for timing error group (teg) reporting |
-
2024
- 2024-01-25 EP EP24706349.8A patent/EP4690544A1/en active Pending
- 2024-01-25 CN CN202480021698.7A patent/CN120937274A/en active Pending
- 2024-01-25 KR KR1020257030586A patent/KR20250165330A/en active Pending
- 2024-01-25 WO PCT/US2024/012915 patent/WO2024210975A1/en not_active Ceased
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120937274A (en) | 2025-11-11 |
| KR20250165330A (en) | 2025-11-25 |
| WO2024210975A1 (en) | 2024-10-10 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20250193839A1 (en) | Carrier phase measurement-based position estimation | |
| EP4591087A1 (en) | Carrier phase measurement assisted position estimation | |
| US20240381141A1 (en) | Multiple carrier phase measurements associated with positioning frequency layer and differential carrier phase measurement reporting | |
| EP4710124A1 (en) | Multiple carrier phase measurements associated with positioning frequency layer and differential carrier phase measurement reporting | |
| EP4652783A1 (en) | Resume request triggered by cell reselection procedure during rrc inactive mode positioning | |
| US12273789B2 (en) | Measurement of sounding reference signal via uplink relay | |
| US12513657B2 (en) | Carrier phase measurement error information associated with position estimation of a user equipment | |
| US12153152B2 (en) | User equipment (UE) handling of delayed sounding reference signal (SRS) configuration for downlink-and-uplink-based positioning methods | |
| US20260025783A1 (en) | Position estimation based on coherency status associated with at least part of a sounding reference signal for positioning instance | |
| US20250175939A1 (en) | Timing synchronization correction for position estimation based on time difference of arrival | |
| EP4690544A1 (en) | Receive-transmit time difference for round-trip time associated with non-terrestrial network entity | |
| WO2024158605A1 (en) | Positioning reference signal measurement schedule based on line of sight condition | |
| EP4649612A1 (en) | Reporting of relative reference signal received power peak associated with positioning reference signal resource | |
| EP4690606A1 (en) | Unified transmission configuration indicator (tci) for positioning reference signals | |
| WO2024238170A1 (en) | Handling of carrier phase correction data packages associated with a position estimation session of a user equipment | |
| EP4620248A1 (en) | Enhanced cell identity (e-cid) positioning enhancements for multi-connectivity | |
| WO2024205829A1 (en) | Phase difference measurement for carrier phase-based positioning | |
| WO2024253761A1 (en) | Processing of sidelink positioning reference signal measurements associated with processing window | |
| WO2025117051A1 (en) | Timing synchronization correction for position estimation based on time difference of arrival | |
| EP4696067A1 (en) | Capability signaling for positioning reference signal bandwidth aggregation across multiple positioning frequency layers | |
| WO2024030710A1 (en) | Non-cell-defining synchronization signal block (ncd-ssb) signaling for neighboring cells for positioning |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: UNKNOWN |
|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE |
|
| PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
| 17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20250916 |
|
| AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC ME MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |